JP7168461B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko machine or a slot machine on which games can be played.

As a gaming machine, game balls, which are game media, are shot into a game area by a shooting device, and when the game balls enter a prize winning area such as a prize winning opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something that can be done. Furthermore, a variable display device capable of variably displaying (also referred to as “fluctuation”) identification information is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information on the variable display device is a specific display result, the game state (game There is a so-called pachinko machine configured to change the state of the machine (ie, more specifically, the state in which the game machine is controlled) to give a predetermined game value to the player.

After setting a predetermined number of bets for one game of predetermined game media, the player operates the start lever to start variable display of the identification information by the variable display device, and the player starts each variable display. By operating a stop button provided corresponding to the display device, the variable display of the identification information is stopped within the range of the predetermined maximum delay time from the operation timing, and the variable display of all the variable display devices is stopped. Winning occurs according to the display result derived when the game is stopped, predetermined game media are paid out according to the winning, and when a specific winning occurs, the game state is changed to a predetermined game value by the player. (so-called slot machines).

The game value is defined as the state of the variable winning ball device provided in the game area of the gaming machine that is advantageous to the player who is likely to win the ball, or the state that is advantageous to the player. It is to generate a right or to be in a state in which the conditions for paying out prize balls are likely to be established.

In a pachinko game machine, a predetermined specific display mode is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display of special symbols (identification information) that is started on the variable display device based on the winning of a game ball in a starting winning hole. If you do, a "jackpot" will occur. It should be noted that the derivation display means that the symbol (final stop symbol) is finally stopped and displayed. When a big win occurs, for example, the big win opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and the game shifts to a big win game state in which the ball is likely to win. Then, in each open period, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the large winning openings are won, the large winning opening is closed. The number of openings of the big winning opening is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 15 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the big winning opening is closed after the opening time has elapsed. Hereinafter, the opening period of each big winning slot may be called a round. Moreover, the game in a round may be called a round game.

In addition, in the variable display device, patterns other than the final stop pattern (for example, the middle pattern among the left, middle, and right patterns) continue for a predetermined period of time and are stopped and shaken in a state in which they match a specific display result. Big wins can occur before the final result is displayed due to moving, scaling, or deformation, multiple symbols fluctuating in sync with the same symbol, or the positions of the displayed symbols changing. The production performed in the state where the sexuality is continuing (hereinafter, these states are referred to as the reach state) is called the reach production. In addition, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Further, the variable display including the reach effect is called the reach variable display. Then, if the display result of the pattern variably displayed on the variable display device is not a specific display result, it becomes "missing" and the variable display state ends. A player plays a game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

In such a game machine, for example, Patent Literature 1 describes that a sub control unit stores error history data and displays it on a liquid crystal display unit. Further, it is described that the types of errors to be stored include power-off.

JP 2017-153681 A

However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, when the entire gaming machine is restarted and when only the sub-control unit is restarted, the power is stored as being turned off without distinction. There is a risk that the process may not be executed optimally, for example, the situation cannot be determined appropriately, and unnecessary processing may be executed.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION Accordingly, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of executing optimum processing according to the situation.

(A) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
power means;
a first control means for performing control by receiving power supply from the power supply means;
a second control means for receiving power supply from the power supply means and storing predetermined information regarding activation based on the instruction information from the first control means;
monitoring means for monitoring the power supplied to the second control means and outputting a predetermined signal to the second control means when the power supply voltage of the power supply is less than a predetermined value;
The second control means is capable of executing a first backup process of storing control-related information in the first storage means and a second backup process of storing control-related information in the second storage means,
The first backup process is a process of storing one piece of information in one storage area,
The second backup process is a process of storing one piece of information in a plurality of storage areas,
The second control means is
executing different start-up processing depending on whether or not the predetermined signal is output from the monitoring means at start-up;
Initialization control is not started when the predetermined signal is output from the monitoring means at startup, initialization control is started after output of the predetermined signal is stopped, and instruction information from the first control means is started. storing the predetermined information in the first storage means based on
Specific information that can specify that only the second control means of the first control means and the second control means has restarted when the predetermined signal is not output from the monitoring means at the time of startup. stored in the second storage means
It is characterized by
(1) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to another aspect is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, comprising power supply means (for example, a power supply board) and power supplied from the power supply means. A first control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11) that performs control, and a second control means that receives power supply from the power supply means and performs control based on instruction information from the first control means. Control means (for example, the second effect control CPU012IW120b mounted on the second effect control board 012IW12b), monitoring means for monitoring the power supplied to the second control means and notifying the second control means (for example, the second A power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127 that monitors the power supplied to the second effect control board 012IW12b and outputs a power off signal to the second effect control CPU012IW120b when the power supply voltage is less than a predetermined value (for example, +8V). ), and the second control means executes different start-up processing according to a notification from the monitoring means at the start of control (for example, when a power-off signal is input from the power monitoring circuit 099IW127 at the start of control , waits for the start of control until the input of the power-off signal stops.Second effect control CPU012IW120b, step 099IWS001, 099IWS002 portion to execute the process.On the other hand, power off from the power monitoring circuit 099IW127 at the time of control start When the signal is not input, without waiting for the start of control, log information including the acquired date and time information as the system reset date and time of the second effect control board 012IW12b is stored in the log area. The feature is that the CPU 012IW 120b executes the processing of steps 099IWS001 and 099IWS003).
According to such a configuration, optimal processing can be executed depending on the situation.

(2) In the game machine of (1) above, the second control means controls the power supply voltage until it is notified by the monitoring means that the power supply voltage of the supplied power supply is equal to or higher than a predetermined value (for example, +8 V) (for example, power supply monitoring Until the input of the power-off signal is stopped from the circuit 099IW127), the control may not be started (for example, the part where the second effect control CPU012IW120b executes the processing of steps 099IWS001 and 099IWS002).
According to such a configuration, optimal processing can be executed depending on the situation.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above, storage means (for example, backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14) capable of retaining stored contents even when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped is provided. In addition, when the second control means is notified by the monitoring means that the power supply voltage of the supplied power supply has changed from less than a predetermined value to a value equal to or higher than the predetermined value at the start of control (for example, at the start of control, the power supply monitoring circuit When a power-off signal is input from the 099IW 127 and the input of the power-off signal is subsequently stopped), predetermined information regarding startup (for example, power-on date and time, setting change start) based on instruction information from the first control means Date and time, setting confirmation start date and time, RAM clear date and time, etc.) are stored in the storage means (for example, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b performs steps 099IWS205, steps 012IWS802, steps 012IWS805, steps 012IWS809, etc.), At the start of control, when the monitoring means notifies that the power supply voltage of the supplied power is equal to or higher than a predetermined value, a predetermined image is displayed on the display means, and the predetermined information is not stored in the storage means (for example, the second When the system reset of the production control board 012IW12b occurs, the initial image is displayed on the image display device 5, but the processing of step 099IWS204 is not executed, and the setting change command, the setting confirmation command, the initialization designation command, etc. Since it does not receive power-on commands, it may not store log information about them.
According to such a configuration, optimum processing can be executed depending on the situation.

(4) In the gaming machine of (3) above, the storage means includes first storage means (for example, a first log area for recording log information for a game shop) and second storage means (for example, log information for a game machine maker). a second log area for recording log information), and the second control means is notified by the monitoring means that the power supply voltage of the supplied power supply has changed from less than a predetermined value to a predetermined value or more at the start of control. When, based on the instruction information from the first control means, stores the predetermined information about the start in the first storage means (for example, the second effect control CPU012IW120b, step 099IWS204, step 012IWS802, step 012IWS805, step 012IWS809 etc.), when the monitoring means notifies that the power supply voltage of the supplied power supply is equal to or higher than a predetermined value at the start of control, it is possible to identify that only the second control means has been restarted. Specific information (eg, log information including the system reset date and time) is stored in the second storage means (eg, the part where the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b executes the processing of N of step 099IWS001 and step 099IWS003) good too.
According to such a configuration, optimal processing can be executed depending on the situation.

(5) In the gaming machine of (4) above, the second control means performs a first backup process for storing control-related information in the first storage means (for example, a backup process for storing log information in a first log area); and a second backup process of storing information about control in a second storage means (for example, a backup process of storing log information in a second log area). , and the second backup process may store one piece of information in a plurality of storage areas (see, for example, FIG. 8-19).
According to such a configuration, optimal processing can be executed depending on the situation.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in the characteristic portion 099IW. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of a 2nd production|presentation control board. 4 is a configuration diagram showing a configuration example of a backup memory board; FIG. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine in a state in which the gaming machine frame is opened. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is an explanatory view showing a jackpot type determination table. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a losing variation pattern determination table; It is an explanatory view showing a non-reach loss variation pattern determination table. It is a flow chart showing the game control main processing in the characteristic portion 099IW. It is a flow chart showing the game control main processing in the characteristic portion 099IW. It is a flow chart showing the game control main processing in the characteristic portion 099IW. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing processing executed when power is turned on; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a display mode of a display monitor in setting change processing; It is a flow chart which shows special design normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows special design normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows a part of production control main processing. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an execution example of backup processing with different degrees of multiplicity; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of processing when a CPU exception event occurs; It is a flow chart which shows an example of timer interruption processing for production control. 9 is a flowchart showing a specific example of command analysis processing; 9 is a flowchart showing a specific example of command analysis processing; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an initial payout determination table; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start waiting processing; It is an explanatory view showing a pre-game suggestion effect determination table. 9 is a flowchart showing variable display start setting processing; 10 is a flow chart showing an example of in-game suggestive effect determination processing. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a game-in-game suggestion effect determination table; It is a flowchart which shows an example of production|presentation determination processing during a big hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows a suggestion production|presentation determination table in a big hit, a character object production|presentation determination table, and a light-guide plate production|presentation determination table. It is a flow chart which shows ending production processing. 9 is a flowchart showing error notification processing; 9 is a flowchart showing error notification processing; 9 is a flowchart showing error notification processing; 9 is a flowchart showing error notification processing; 4 is a flowchart showing maintenance mode processing; 9 is a flowchart showing setting change time recording processing. 7 is a flowchart showing current time setting processing; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the setting timing of the current time; 7 is a flowchart showing a power failure date and time recording process; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining recording timing of log information of a power failure date and time; It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a display screen during maintenance mode; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a display screen during maintenance mode; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a display screen during maintenance mode; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a display screen during maintenance mode; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a security cover in Modification 1; It is a figure which shows opening and closing of the frame for game machines in the modified example 1. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a security cover in modification 2; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing opening and closing of the gaming machine frame in modification 2; It is an explanatory diagram showing a pachinko game machine in the third modification. FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a maintenance history screen in modification 4; FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a maintenance history screen in modified example 5;

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 constituting a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area), a variable display (also called a special game) of special symbols (also called special symbols) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are variably displayed (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, up and down direction scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronism is generically called simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count is also referred to as the total reserved memory count.

In addition, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first suspension display 25A and a second suspension display 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. , the number of first reserved memories is displayed, and the second reserved display 25B displays the number of second reserved memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable winglets. comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and the closed state in which the game balls do not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (second start It is also said that the prize-winning mouth is open.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device provided with an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions on the left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 which are always kept open by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning hole is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize winning port door is in the ON state, the special prize winning port door opens the big prize winning port, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big prize winning port. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize to a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Above the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above structure, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the game machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effects is provided at the periphery of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area from the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). Below the upper plate, there is provided a batted ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotating operation of a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern per pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern per pattern". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern losing pattern) other than the normal pattern per pattern is stop-displayed as the determined normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern losing". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running, or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start win has occurred If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the type of the big hit described below) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big win" and a big winning symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example, "2") different from the symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "minor win", it is controlled to the small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is the timing of the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until whichever comes first. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the big winning slot can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, a plurality of types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc. described later) are prepared, and the jackpot is obtained according to these. type is set. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, and a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the same opening mode as the big winning game state when some jackpot types etc.), the big prize opening is opened. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, a predetermined return after power-on) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs). If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, there may not be a "small hit" as a display result of a special figure game.

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or the game effect lamp 9 This may be performed by turning on/off, operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns), which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns, is displayed. ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern) to the "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depends on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of a ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1, 3, 5", etc.) are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "minor hit"). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is a "big hit" of some jackpot types (jackpot types in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it becomes a "minor hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special game is "Loss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" Also referred to as "non-reach loss".) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "losing", after the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("reach losing") that is not a big hit combination. (Also called) fixed decorative pattern is displayed stop (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to the variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. In addition, even during the small winning game state, the effect during the small winning to report the small winning game state is executed. It should be noted that during the small winning game state, some of the jackpot types (jackpot types in the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small hit game state, for example, the jackpot type in the subsequent game state high probability state) jackpot game By executing a common performance in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small winning game state and after the end of the big winning game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 .

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) when the CPU 103 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches (gate switch 21, starting switch (first starting switch 22A and second starting switch 22B), count switch 23) for detecting game balls A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Sound output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signal and lamp signal, etc.), and control of movable body 32 (supply of signal for operating movable body 32, etc.) are executed by effect control CPU 120. You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 is an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11 etc., and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main substrate 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.) register setting, and setting to make the RAM 102 accessible.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted, for example, on the power board. When the clear switch is turned on and the power is turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 through the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3; Yes), initialization processing (step S8) is executed. In the initialization processing, the CPU 103 performs RAM clear processing for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Moreover, CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates initialization to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not ON (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stoppage of the power supply. In this process when the power supply is stopped, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for progressing the game, but also the states of the backup flags and error detection codes. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is ON. If the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

If backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the backed up data (using an error detection code) to determine whether the data is normal (step S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply was stopped, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs recovery processing (step S6) to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the game state at the time of stopping the power supply is restored, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols is resumed from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. will be

And CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates restoration from a power failure to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that designates the backed up game state before the power cut, and if the special game is being executed, the effect control that designates the display result of the special game that is being executed You may make it transmit a command. These commands can use the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process described later. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command specifying the recovery time from the power failure, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the power failure has been restored or is being restored from the power failure. Display the screen for The effect control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the effect control command.

After completing the recovery process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the timer interrupt process for game control shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby, through the switch circuit 110, the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port. It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). CPU103 by executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of the big hit game state and small hit game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized (details later).

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, the occurrence of starting winning is detected, and the process of storing the pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updating the pending storage number is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of prefetching and judging a display result or a variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the generation of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination to the effect control board 12 is performed. . The effect control command at the time of starting winning thus set to be transmitted is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting prize determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small hit", and the type of the big hit in the case of "big hit". is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the condition for starting the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of variation patterns is selected using random numbers for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination as to whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit." including the process of determining In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "losing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "losing", when it is controlled to the time saving state or the probability variable state, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are finished, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is finished.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions, and processing for judging whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending production as a production operation for informing the end of the jackpot game state has passed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end processing is terminated.

Small hit opening pretreatment of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

Small hit during opening processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". In this process during opening of the small prize, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, and the timing of returning the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing for determining whether or not When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning open processing is ended.

Small hit end processing of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small-hit end processing includes processing of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period in which the performance operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has passed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 6 is executed. When the production control main processing shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI order). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main substrate 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S177 as described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving the production control command designating the start of the jackpot game state or the small hit game state, if the command designates the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small-hit game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit production process. Also, when the waiting time for receiving the command has passed without receiving a command designating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game was "losing". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The production process during the small hit of step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "4". In this small-hit mid-performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small-hit game state, and executes various performance controls in the small-hit game state based on the set content. . Further, in the small-hit middle production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the small-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small-hit end production. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In this small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, etc., and various effect control at the end of the small win game state based on the setting content. to run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the small winning end effect process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. Also, in the big-hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the ending production process. 7", and the effect processing during the big hit is ended.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, effect control patterns corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the set contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the relevant pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted to set a predetermined number of bets. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a slot machine equipped with one or more bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to a computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, the ratio of one is "0%" and the other is "100%" or less than "100%".

(Description on Characteristic Portion 099IW)
Next, the characteristic portion 099IW will be described. FIG. 8-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in the characteristic portion 099IW. In this characteristic portion 099IW, as shown in FIG. 8-1, a passage gate 012IW041 is provided on the right side of the image display device 5 in place of the passage gate 41 shown in FIG. A game ball that has passed through the passing gate 012IW041 is detected by the gate switch 012IW021 (see FIG. 8-2).

8-1, in this characteristic portion 099IW, instead of the special variable winning ball device 7 shown in FIG. A variable winning device 012IW007a and a second special variable winning device 012IW007a constituting a second big winning port are provided. A game ball that has won the first special variable winning device 012IW007a is detected by the first count switch 012IW023a (see FIG. 8-2). Also, the game ball that has won the second special variable winning device 012IW007b is detected by the second count switch 012IW023b (see FIG. 8-2). Furthermore, a so-called V winning area is provided in the second special variable winning device 012IW007b, and a game ball that has won the V winning area in the second special variable winning device 012IW007b is activated by a V winning switch 012IW024 (FIG. 8- 2).

Incidentally, in this example, the game ball that has won the general winning hole 10 is detected by the winning hole switch 012IW010a (see FIG. 8-2).

Also, in this example, when the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) receives a detection signal from the gate switch 012IW021 (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 012IW041), the game ball passes through the passage gate 012IW041. Control is performed to transmit a gate passage designation command designating that the gate has passed to the second effect control board 012IW12b. In addition, when the game control microcomputer 100 receives a detection signal from the winning opening switch 012IW010a (when a game ball wins in the general winning opening 10), a winning opening that designates that a game ball has won in the general winning opening 10 Control is performed to transmit a winning designation command to the second effect control board 012IW12b.

Further, in this example, the game control microcomputer 100 receives a command indicating that the batted ball supply tray (lower tray) is full, for example, from the payout control microcomputer mounted on the payout control board. , the full-tank detection command indicating that the batted ball supply tray (lower tray) has been detected to be full is controlled to be transmitted to the second effect control board 012IW12b. The payout control microcomputer, for example, confirms whether or not a detection signal has been input from a full-tank switch for detecting a full-tank state provided in the batted ball supply tray (lower tray). A full state of the supply tray (lower tray) can be detected.

In this example, since the passage gate 012IW041 is provided in the right area of the game area, when the game state is controlled to the high base state, the player aims at the right side of the game area to shoot. It is more advantageous to perform the operation (so-called right-handed operation). Also, in this example, the first special variable winning device 012IW007a and the second special variable winning device 012IW007b are provided in the right area of the game area, so that the player performs the right-handed operation during the jackpot game. is advantageous.

On the other hand, in this example, when the game state is not controlled to the high base state (that is, is controlled to the low base state) and the jackpot game is not in progress, the player aims at the left side of the game area. It is assumed that it is easier for the game ball to enter the first start winning hole if a shooting operation (so-called left-handed operation) is performed, which is advantageous.

In this characteristic part 099IW, when a probability variable jackpot is achieved, for example, a 16 round jackpot game is executed, and the first special variable winning device 012IW007a is used in the 1st to 3rd rounds and the 5th to 16th rounds. Until a predetermined period of time (29.5 seconds in this example) elapses or a predetermined number (10 in this example) of game balls wins, the controller is kept open, and in the fourth round, the second special variable wins. The device 012IW007b is controlled in an open state until a predetermined period (29.5 seconds in this example) elapses or a predetermined number (10 in this example) of game balls wins. Then, on the condition that the game ball has entered the V winning area in the second special variable winning device 012IW007b in the fourth round, the game state is controlled to the definite variable state after the big win game ends. In this example, when the probability variable jackpot is won, the condition is that the player wins the prize in the V prize area. Therefore, it will be controlled to the variable probability state after the jackpot game is completed.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 099IW, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) is a special symbol process process (step S25) during jackpot opening processing (step S115) and after jackpot opening processing (step S116). , when it is detected that a game ball has entered the V winning area in the second special variable winning device 012IW007b (specifically, when an ON signal is input from the V winning switch 012IW024), the game ball enters the V winning area. Control is performed to transmit a V winning designation command that designates winning (that V winning has occurred) to the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b.

Also, in the case of a non-probable variable jackpot (normal jackpot), for example, a 16-round jackpot game is executed, and in the 1st to 3rd rounds and the 5th to 16th rounds, the first special variable winning device 012IW007a is controlled to an open state until a predetermined period (29.5 seconds in this example) elapses or a predetermined number (10 in this example) of game balls wins, and in the fourth round the second special variable The winning device 012IW007b is controlled to be open until a very short period (in this example, 0.1 second) has passed. In this example, when the normal jackpot is won, the second special variable prize winning device 012IW007b is controlled in the open state in the fourth round in the same way as the probability variable jackpot, but for a very short period (in this example, 0.1 seconds), so it is almost never controlled to the variable probability state after the big hit game is over.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 099IW, as shown in FIG. 8-2, instead of the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2, a first effect control board 012IW12a and a second effect control board 012IW12b are mounted.

The first effect control board 012IW12a, which receives power supply from the power supply board, is equipped with a first effect control CPU012IW120a, ROM012IW121a, RAM012IW122a, display control section 012IW123, and I/O012IW125a. The first production control CPU012IW120a has a function of receiving a command from the second production control CPU012IW120b mounted on the second production control board 012IW12b and executing production based on the received command. Further, in this example, detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B are input to the first effect control CPU012IW120a mounted on the first effect control board 012IW12a. In this example, the first effect control CPU 012IW 120a is set to 10 ms as the timer interrupt time at the start of power supply, and the timer interrupt occurs every 10 ms to execute various processes.

The second effect control board 012IW12b, which receives power supply from the power supply board, is equipped with a second effect control CPU012IW120b, ROM012IW121b, RAM012IW122b, random number circuit 012IW124, I/O012IW125b, real time clock 012IW126, and power monitoring circuit 099IW127. The second effect control CPU 012IW 120b has a function of executing the effect control main process, and receives and receives the effect control command from the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 that receives power supply from the power supply board. It has a function of executing the production control process processing etc. based on the production control command (however, it controls the production means such as the actual image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9, and the stick controller 31A and The control of the part that accepts the input from the input means such as the push button 31B is performed on the side of the first effect control CPU 012IW 120a). In this example, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b is set to 10 ms as the timer interrupt time at the start of power supply, and the timer interrupt occurs every 10 ms to execute various processes.

In addition, the second effect control CPU012IW120b has a function of recording predetermined log information in the log area provided in the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14. Although the details will be described later, the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14 can retain the stored contents even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped. In addition, the second effect control CPU012IW120b also has a function of recording predetermined log information in a log area provided in the RAM012IW122b using the date and time information output by the real-time clock 012IW126. The RAM 012IW 122b is backed up by a backup power supply mounted on a power board (not shown), and even if the power supply to the game machine is stopped, at least the log information recorded in the log area is retained for a predetermined period.

The power monitoring circuit 099IW127 monitors the power supplied to the second effect control board 012IW12b, and when the power supply voltage is less than a predetermined value (for example, +8V), the second effect control CPU012IW120b is a power off signal. to output Specifically, the power-off signal is turned on (low level). In addition, in this characteristic portion 099IW, the power monitoring circuit 099IW127 is provided on the second effect control board 012IW12b. may be provided above. In this case, the power monitoring circuit 099IW127 may be configured to be capable of outputting a power-off signal to the main board 11, the second effect control board 012IW12b, the first effect control board 012IW12a, and the like. Further, for example, a power monitoring circuit 099IW127 may be provided on the main substrate 11, and a signal corresponding to a power cutoff signal may be output from the main substrate 11 to the second effect control substrate 012IW12b.

In the second effect control board 012IW12b, a power supply circuit mounted on the second effect control board 012IW12b generates power from +12V to +3V or +1V. As the second effect control CPU012IW120b is operable if +3V is supplied (for example, the core operates at +1V, and communication with the ROM is possible at +3V), but the power supply circuit that generates +3V and +1V , +3V can be generated if +4 to 5V is supplied, so there is a risk of operation before the power is stably supplied.

Therefore, when power is supplied to the second effect control board 012IW12b, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is supplied with the power supply voltage while the power supply disconnection signal is input from the power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127 (that is, the power supply voltage is a predetermined value. (For example, while it is less than +8V), control is not started, and when the input of the power-off signal is stopped (that is, the supplied power supply voltage reaches a predetermined value (for example, +8V) or higher, and the power supply stable supply), it is configured to initiate control. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b from operating before the power supply is stably supplied.

If the power supply to the game machine is stopped and then the power supply to the game machine is started, the power supply A power-off signal is input from the monitoring circuit 099IW127, and after a standby period until the input of the power-off signal is stopped (that is, until the supplied power voltage rises and exceeds a predetermined value (eg, +8 V)), The control of the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b is started (corresponding to the processing in the case of Y in step 099IWS001 described later). In this case, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b receives at least an initialization designation command or a command at the time of recovery from the game control microcomputer 100.

On the other hand, if the system reset of the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b occurs, the power supply to the game machine itself is not stopped, but at the start of control of the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b (that is, it becomes operable. ), the power supply shutdown signal is not input from the power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127 (that is, the supplied power supply voltage has already risen and exceeds a predetermined value (for example, +8 V)), and the standby period has expired. Without passing, the control of the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b is started (corresponding to the processing in the case of N in step 099IWS001 described later). In this case, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b is not transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 with power-on commands such as initialization designation commands and recovery commands.

Therefore, the second effect control CPU012IW120b, whether or not there is a standby period at the start of control (that is, when it becomes operable), whether the power failure of the gaming machine itself has occurred, system reset of the second effect control CPU012IW120b, etc. has occurred can be identified. Specifically, when there is a standby period at the start of control, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b changes the power supply voltage of the supplied power supply from less than a predetermined value to a predetermined value or more after it becomes operable. is notified from the power supply monitor circuit 099IW127 by the state of the power supply interruption signal), it can be specified that the power supply interruption of the game machine itself has occurred. In addition, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b, when there is no waiting period at the start of control (that is, when it becomes operable, the power source voltage of the supplied power source is already a predetermined value or more is detected from the power source monitoring circuit 099IW 127. When notified by the state of the power off signal), it can be specified that the system reset of the second effect control CPU012IW120b or the like has occurred. Hereinafter, the term "power failure of the game machine itself" or "restart of the game machine itself" is used, but this means that at least the main board 11 and the effect control board (for example, the first effect control board 012IW12a and the second effect control board 012IW12b) are powered. This concept includes disconnection and restart.

As shown in FIG. 8-2, the second effect control board 012IW12b is interconnected with the backup memory board 099IW14. The backup memory board 099IW14 is a board for storing backup data provided separately from the first effect control board 012IW12a and the second effect control board 012IW12b, and according to the backup control signal from the second effect control board 012IW12b, the backup data is configured to be able to execute write processing and read processing. The backup data write process writes and stores the backup data in the backup data memory. In the backup data reading process, the backup data stored in the backup data memory is read and transmitted to the second effect control board 012IW12b or the like.

FIG. 8-3 shows a configuration example of the second effect control board 012IW12b. Of the electronic components such as the second effect control CPU012IW120b, ROM012IW121b, and RAM012IW122b mounted on the second effect control board 012IW12b, some or all of the components can be detachable by inserting and removing connector pins from the connector socket. may be attached, and other components may be mountably attached by soldering or the like. A connector 099IW150, a connector 099IW151, a connector 099IW154 and a connector 099IW156 are mounted on the second effect control board 012IW12b together with these electronic components. The second effect control board 012IW12b includes a plurality of electronic components such as a serial communication circuit 099IW137 in addition to electronic components such as the second effect control CPU012IW120b, ROM012IW121b, and RAM012IW122b.

The serial communication circuit 099IW137 is a circuit capable of transmitting and receiving communication data by a serial communication method to various boards and various circuits other than the second effect control board 012IW12b. The serial communication circuit 099IW137 may be capable of transmitting and receiving communication data corresponding to a plurality of serial communication standards such as UART (Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter), SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface), and I2C (Inter-Integrated Circuit). The serial communication circuit 099IW137 may include a plurality of communication processing units including a receiving unit, a transmitting unit, a communication control unit, a serial communication data register, a serial status register, a serial control register, and the like. UART is an asynchronous serial communication standard, and transfers communication data using a start bit and a stop bit. In this case, the clock signal line becomes unnecessary, but the communication speed (baud rate) becomes relatively low. SPI and I2C are clock-synchronous serial communication standards, and transfer communication data using a clock signal. In this case, a clock signal line is required, but the communication speed (baud rate) is relatively high. In the case of SPI, signal lines are provided respectively corresponding to clock signals, transmission data signals, reception data signals, and slave selection signals. In the case of I2C, signal lines corresponding to clock signals and data signals are provided. The plurality of communication processing units included in the serial communication circuit 099IW137 may have different hardware configurations according to the plurality of types of serial communication standards.

The connector 099IW150, the connector 099IW151, the connector 099IW154, and the connector 099IW156 are configured using receptacles, for example, and have a configuration of a wiring connection device capable of detachably connecting various signal wirings. Connector 099IW150, connector 099IW151, connector 099IW154 and connector 099IW156 enable output of various signals via different paths such as wiring patterns different from each other in the second effect control board 012IW12b. The connector 099IW 150 is a connector port for main board wiring to which the main board wiring electrically connected to the main board 11 can be connected. The connector 099IW151 is a connector port for power supply wiring to which a power supply wiring electrically connected to a power supply unit such as a power supply board can be connected. The connector 099IW154 is a connector port for backup wiring to which a backup wiring electrically connected to a backup unit such as the backup memory board 099IW14 can be connected. The connector 099IW156 is an inspection wiring connector port capable of connecting an inspection wiring that is electrically connected to an information processing apparatus (personal computer, etc.) for inspection, testing, or development. The inspection information processing device may function as an inspection device for the pachinko game machine 1 by executing a specific software program, for example. Thus, the connector 099IW156 is an electronic component used as a connecting member to which the inspection device of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is connected.

The connector 099IW156 can be connected to an inspection wire at, for example, the trial production stage, the development stage, or the manufacturing stage of the pachinko game machine 1, and the second production control CPU 012IW120b is shipped in response to a test command different from the production control command. A previous inspection process may be made executable. Inspection processing before shipment, for example, before the completion of the software program during trial production or development, the internal parameters and input/output signals when the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b executes a part or all of the program code, It may include verifiable processing. The verification environment in which the inspection process is executed before shipment may be, for example, an execution environment corresponding to the state in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed on a gaming machine installation island, or the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be operated independently on a personal computer. It may also be an execution environment in which the operating status can be checked by connecting to an information processing device such as. In addition, the connector 099IW156 can be connected to an inspection wiring at the stage of collecting the pachinko game machine 1, for example, and can execute the reading process of the backup data in response to a test command different from the effect control command. good. Alternatively, the connector 099IW156 may be removed at the shipping stage of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. Alternatively, the connector 099IW156 is installed only in a predetermined model such as a demonstration or test model other than the model of the pachinko gaming machine 1 installed in the game hall. It may not be mounted. A land capable of mounting the connector 099IW156 may be formed on the board surface of the second effect control board 012IW12b. When the connector 099IW156 is removed or not mounted, the copper foil pattern of the land where the connector 099IW156 is no longer mounted may be soldered. The soldering process is a process of applying solder to the exposed portions of the copper foil pattern, and may be performed using, for example, a cream solder printer, or may be performed by any method that does not use a cream solder printer. . Depending on whether the connector 099IW156 is mounted or not, the same soldering process may be performed, or different soldering processes may be performed. When the soldering process is performed in the same process, there is no need to fabricate multiple patterns of the metal mask used in the cream solder printing machine for applying solder to the lands, thus preventing an increase in the costs required to fabricate the board. Soldering the unmounted lands where electronic components are not mounted, such as the connector 099IW156, prevents the copper foil pattern from oxidizing and disconnection caused by the corrosion of the wiring pattern, thereby properly maintaining the quality of the board. be able to.

In addition, when an electronic component such as the connector 099IW156 is not mounted, the copper foil pattern of the land on which the electronic component is not mounted is not limited to being soldered and coated, and for example, a resist that is an insulating coating is applied. It may be coated. By covering the lands on which electronic components are not mounted in this way, it is possible to prevent oxidation of the copper foil pattern, prevent problems such as disconnection due to corrosion of the wiring pattern, and appropriately maintain the quality of the board. I wish I could. On the other hand, lands on which electronic components are not mounted may not be covered by soldering or the like. For example, when lands are soldered, solder as a conductor adheres to the copper foil pattern, which may cause an unintended short circuit or current path in the wiring pattern. Therefore, by not soldering the lands on which electronic components are not mounted, it is possible to prevent solder from adhering to the copper foil pattern, prevent problems such as short circuits in wiring patterns and changes in current paths, and ensure proper board quality. can be maintained. By performing insulation film treatment instead of soldering, it is possible to prevent solder from adhering to the copper foil pattern, prevent problems such as short circuits in the wiring pattern and changes in current paths, and appropriately maintain the quality of the board. You may do so.

FIG. 8-4(A) shows a configuration example of various circuits mounted on the backup memory board 099IW14. The backup memory board 099IW14 is provided with a memory controller 099IW200, an RTC 099IW201, a serial communication circuit 099IW202, a test connection section 099IW203, backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D, and a connector 099IW220. Thus, the backup memory board 099IW14 is provided with backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D as a plurality of backup data storage units. The memory controller 099IW200 can perform write processing and read processing of backup data according to the backup control signal from the second effect control board 012IW12b. The RTC099IW201 can measure the current date and time and supply date and time information including date information and time information to the memory controller 099IW200. The serial communication circuit 099IW202 is a circuit capable of transmitting and receiving communication data to and from the second effect control board 012IW12b by a serial communication method. The serial communication circuit 099IW202 may be capable of transmitting/receiving communication data conforming to a specific serial communication standard such as SPI. The serial communication circuit 099IW202 only needs to have a communication processing section with a hardware configuration compatible with such a specific serial communication standard. The inspection connecting portion 099IW203 may be formed as a specific conductor portion including a terminal capable of inputting/outputting an inspection signal, such as a test point. When the test connection portion 099IW203 is a test point, the test probe is brought into contact with the test connection portion 099IW203, and the test signal is generated between the test device and the second effect control CPU012IW120b of the second effect control board 012IW12b. It is sufficient if input/output and reading of backup data can be performed. The inspection connection unit 099IW203 does not pass through the second effect control CPU012IW120b of the second effect control board 012IW12b, and between the test device and the memory controller 099IW200 of the backup memory board 099IW14 or the backup data memory 099IW210A to 210D, the test signal input/output and backup data reading may be performed. In this way, the inspection connection unit 099IW203 can provide an interface for performing data communication with an inspection device, which is an external device, in the backup memory board 099IW14.

The backup data memory 099IW210A-210D may be partially or wholly constructed using a non-volatile ferroelectric memory such as FRAM® (Ferroelectric RAM), and partially or entirely using a battery-equipped SRAM (Static RAM). may be configured using The backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D may be partially or wholly configured using flash memory such as NAND-ROM, EEPROM, or HDD (Hard Disk Drive). A non-volatile ferroelectric memory called FRAM (registered trademark) has a memory cell using a ferroelectric film as a capacitor insulating film, and even when the operating power supply is turned off, the memory written in the memory cell remains unchanged. No data is lost. A configuration using FRAM (registered trademark) does not require a battery backup for data retention, and achieves high-speed writing, high number of rewrites, and low power consumption compared to non-volatile memories such as flash memory, EEPROM, and HDD. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in installation area, simplify the device configuration, improve operation efficiency, and appropriately store and save backup data. In addition, the disposal of the battery becomes unnecessary, the disappearance of the stored contents due to replacement of the battery is prevented, and the backup data can be properly stored and preserved. The backup data memories 099IW210A-210D may be backed up by a backup power supply mounted on the power supply board. In this way, the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D can retain the stored contents even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. The backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D may be able to hold the stored contents without using a backup power supply, for example, when part or all of them are configured using FRAM (registered trademark). Alternatively, the backup data memories 099IW210A-210B may be able to retain their stored contents using a backup power supply, for example, when part or all of them are configured using battery-equipped SRAMs.

The backup memory board 099IW14 uses the date and time information output by the RTC099IW201 to store and store various types of log information in the log areas provided in the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D. Memory controller 099IW200, in accordance with the instructions and instructions sent from the second effect control CPU012IW120b of the second effect control board 012IW12b, it is possible to execute the write process and read process of the storage data to the backup data memory 099IW210A ~ 210D. . In this case, by executing the write process and read process of the stored data indicating the log information including the date and time information, the operation history, setting history, It suffices if the error history and the like can be stored so as to be verifiable after the fact.

FIG. 8-4(B) shows a configuration example for connecting the second effect control board 012IW12b and the backup memory board 099IW14. The second effect control board 012IW12b has a connector 099IW154 that can be attached to and detached from the connector 099IW220 of the backup memory board 099IW14. The backup memory board 099IW14 has a connector 099IW220 that can be attached to and detached from the connector 099IW154 of the second effect control board 012IW12b. By connecting the connector 099IW154 and the connector 099IW220, the second effect control board 012IW12b and the backup memory board 099IW14 can be physically and electrically connected. A connector 099IW154 provided on the second effect control board 012IW12b has terminals TM01 to TM06. A connector 099IW220 provided on the backup memory board 099IW14 has terminals TM11 to TM16. The terminals TM01 to TM06 of the connector 099IW154 and the terminals TM11 to TM16 of the connector 099IW220 are physically and electrically connected when the connector 099IW154 and the connector 099IW220 are coupled (for example, the terminals TM01 and TM11). It is sufficient if the relationship is connected to

The terminal TM01 provided in the connector 099IW154 of the second effect control board 012IW12b can provide a specific voltage such as VD1. The terminal TM02 provided in the connector 099IW154 of the second effect control board 012IW12b can receive a specific voltage VD1 used for confirming connection with the backup memory board 099IW14. For example, the specific voltage VD1 output from the terminal TM01 provided in the connector 099IW154 of the second effect control board 012IW12b is supplied to the terminal TM11 provided in the connector 099IW220 of the backup memory board 099IW14. The terminals TM11 and TM12 of the connector 099IW220 may be short-circuited on the substrate of the backup memory substrate 099IW14. Therefore, when the connector 099IW154 and the connector 099IW220 are coupled, a voltage corresponding to VD1 is applied from the terminal TM12 of the connector 099IW220 on the backup memory board 099IW14 to the terminal TM02 of the connector 099IW154 on the second effect control board 012IW12b. is supplied. On the other hand, when the connector 099IW154 and the connector 099IW220 are not connected, the voltage is not supplied to the terminal TM02 of the connector 099IW154 in the second effect control board 012IW12b.

In the second effect control board 012IW12b, the effect control CPU 012IW120b determines the voltage value at the terminal TM02 of the connector 099IW154 in order to confirm the connection state with the backup memory board 099IW14. In this case, if the voltage value of the terminal TM02 is a high voltage value corresponding to VD1, it can be determined that the second effect control board 012IW12b and the backup memory board 099IW14 are connected (connected state). On the other hand, if the voltage value of the terminal TM02 is a low voltage value corresponding to voltage non-supply, it is determined that the second effect control board 012IW12b and the backup memory board 099IW14 are not connected (unconnected state). can. In this way, based on the voltage at the terminal TM02, which is a member for connection confirmation, the connection state between the second effect control board 012IW12b and the backup memory board 099IW14 can be confirmed. It should be noted that it is not limited to confirming the connection state based on the terminal voltage, and for example, the connection state may be confirmed based on the input state of a specific signal. Alternatively, the connection state may be confirmed using a switch or sensor as a connection confirmation member.

The terminals TM03 to TM06 provided in the connector 099IW154 of the second effect control board 012IW12b are wire-connected to the serial communication circuit 099IW137 provided in the second effect control board 012IW12b. The terminals TM13 and TM14 of the connector 099IW220 of the backup memory board 099IW14 are wire-connected to the serial communication circuit 099IW202. Therefore, the wires connected to the terminals TM03 and TM04 of the connector 099IW154 and the terminals TM11 and TM12 of the connector 099IW220 are connected to the second effect control CPU 012IW120b and the backup memory board 099IW14 via the serial communication circuit 099IW137 and the serial communication circuit 099IW202. Electrical connections are provided so that stored data can be transferred to and from backup data memories 099IW 210A-210D. The terminals TM15 and TM16 of the connector 099IW220 of the backup memory board 099IW14 are wire-connected to the test connecting portion 099IW203. As a result, the wires connected to the terminals TM05 and TM06 of the connector 099IW154 and the terminals TM15 and TM16 of the connector 099IW220 are connected via the serial communication circuit 099IW137 to the second effect control CPU 012IW120b and the test connection portion of the backup memory board 099IW14. An electrical connection is provided between the 099IW 203 so that inspection signals can be sent and received and stored data can be transferred.

The backup memory board 099IW14 is configured to be detachable from the second effect control board 012IW12b. As a result, for example, in the case of the pachinko game machine 1 that does not use the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D, the backup memory board 099IW14 can be removed, thereby increasing the flexibility of the device configuration and increasing the manufacturing cost. can be prevented. In addition, the backup memory board 099IW14 can be removed to read out and analyze the stored data, so that the workload of inspecting the stored data can be reduced. The real-time clock 012IW126 provided in the second effect control board 012IW12b may provide the current time for timing adjustment for executing effects in which, for example, a plurality of pachinko game machines 1 are interlocked. something is needed. On the other hand, the RTC 099IW 201 of the backup memory board 099IW 14 only needs to be able to identify the before and after memory processing executed for the backup data memories 099IW 210A to 210D, so a relatively low-precision RTC 099IW 201 can sufficiently satisfy the application. can be done. As described above, the RTC 099IW201 of the backup memory board 099IW14 only needs to be of relatively low accuracy, so that an increase in manufacturing cost can be prevented. In addition, the structure and function with which backup memory board|substrate 099IW14 is provided may be comprised so that 2nd production|presentation control board 012IW12b may be provided. For example, the configuration and functions of backup data memories 099IW210A-210D may be realized by RAM 012IW122b. Even in this case, for example, the wiring pattern in the second effect control board 012IW12b, or a switch or a sensor may be used as a connection confirmation member to confirm the connection state.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-5, the pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame 012IW001a formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape, and a game board constituting a game board surface. (gauge board) 2 (see FIG. 1) and a game machine frame (underframe) 012IW003 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. As shown in FIG. A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area. Also, in the game machine frame 012IW003, a glass door frame 012IW003a having a glass window is positioned around the left side between a door open position where the front face of the game machine frame 012IW003 is opened and a door closed position where the front face is closed. The game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 012IW003a, and the game area can be seen through the glass window when the glass door frame 012IW003a is closed.

In addition, the game machine frame 012IW003 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a store clerk or the like into a lock (not shown) to unlock it. The door frame 012IW003a cannot be opened.

The main board 11 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 while being housed in a board case 012IW201 configured to be openable by a first member and a second member. The main board 11 is also provided with a setting key 012IW051 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, which will be described later.

A setting switching main body provided with an operation unit that can be operated by a player such as these setting keys 012IW051 is housed in the board case 012IW201 together with the main board 11, and the setting keys 012IW051 must open the board case 012IW201. are exposed to the rear side through an opening formed in the right rear portion of the substrate case 012IW201 so that the substrate case 012IW201 can also be operated.

Since the board case 012IW201 having the setting keys 012IW051 is provided on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1, it is impossible to operate from the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 when the game machine frame 3 is closed. The operation becomes possible by opening the game machine frame 3 using the door key. In addition, since the setting key 012IW051 requires operation of a setting key owned by a store clerk or the like of the game arcade, only the store clerk possessing the setting key can operate it. The setting key 012IW051 is also a switch capable of switching between ON and OFF, which will be described later. In this characterizing portion 099IW, the door key and the setting key are separate keys, but one key may also be used.

Further, a display monitor 012IW029 and a display changeover switch 012IW030 for switching the display of the display monitor 012IW029 are arranged in the substrate case 012IW201. The display monitor 012IW029 and the display changeover switch 012IW030 are connected to the main board 11 and arranged at the upper left part of the board case 012IW201. That is, the display monitor 012IW029 and the display changeover switch 012IW030 are arranged in front of the main substrate 11 in the substrate case 012IW201. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the game machine frame 012IW003 is not opened, the front when viewing the main board 11 is the back side of the game board 2 when the game machine frame 012IW003 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁However, the front when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko game machine 1 may be common.

As described above, the setting key 012IW051 in the characteristic portion 099IW cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. There is a possibility that the setting key 012IW051 is operated from inside the installed game island or the like. Therefore, in this characteristic part 099IW, as shown in FIGS. 8-5 and 8-6, the right end of the outer frame 012IW001a is provided with the right side of the board case 012IW201 including the setting key 012IW051 when the game machine frame 012IW003 is closed. A security cover 012IW500A is attached to cover from the rear side. The security cover 012IW500A is a substantially L-shaped member comprising a short piece 012IW500Aa facing forward and backward, and a long piece 012IW500Ab extending from the rear end of the short piece 012IW500Aa toward the left side of the pachinko game machine 1. , and is made of a plate-shaped synthetic resin material having transparency. The vertical dimension of the short piece 012IW500Aa is substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the back plate of the substrate case 012IW201. The security cover 012IW500A is fixed to the right end of the outer frame 012IW001a via the front end of the short piece 012IW500Aa.

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 8-5, the long piece 012IW500Ab abuts (or approaches) the right part of the board case 012IW201 from the rear of the pachinko game machine 1 when the game machine frame 012IW003 is closed. Thus, the right side portion of the substrate case 012IW201 including the setting key 012IW051 is covered from the back side of the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加Therefore, the setting key 012IW051 becomes inoperable due to the long piece 012IW500Ab. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8-6, in the state where the game machine frame 012IW003 is open, the setting key 012IW051 moves together with the game machine frame 012IW003 and separates from the long piece 012IW500Ab. When the state covered by 012IW500Ab is released, it becomes operable.

In other words, the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic part 099IW is maintained in a restricted state in which the security cover 012IW500A restricts the operation of the operating part including the setting key 012IW051 when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is open, the restriction state by the security cover 012IW500A is released, and the operation of the setting key 012IW051 is permitted.

Since the substrate case 012IW201 is provided on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1, it is extremely difficult to access the setting keys 012IW051 when the game machine frame 012IW003 is closed. The set value cannot be changed by operating the setting key 012IW051 unless the game machine frame 012IW003 is opened by the door key.

However, in a state where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed on a game island (not shown) of the gaming hall, even if the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed, for example, other pachinko gaming machines adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 An unauthorized member such as a wire or a cell plate is inserted from between a game device such as a card unit or a spacer member installed between the pachinko game machine 1 and the setting key 012IW051 on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1. Therefore, when the game machine frame 012IW003 is closed, the security cover 012IW500A restricts the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 012IW051. By maintaining such a restricted state, the fraudulent act can be suitably suppressed.

Further, even in a regulation state in which the game machine frame 012IW003 is closed and the security cover 012IW500A covers the right side of the back of the board case 012IW201 including the setting key 012IW051, the security cover 012IW500A having transparency is used to accommodate the board case 012IW201. Since it is possible to see through the main substrate 11 and the like mounted thereon, it is possible to easily check the mounting surface of the main substrate 11 on which electronic components such as the CPU 103 are mounted and the status of sealing seals and the like.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101 and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of various random numbers used on the main substrate 11 side by executing a random number generating program.

In this characteristic part 099IW, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for big hit type determination, the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination, and the normal figure display result determination Numerical data indicating the random number MR4 of , and the random number MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled so as to be countable. Random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. FIG. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100 . Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

The ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. In addition, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main substrate 11, and the variation mode of each symbol in the variable display such as special symbols and normal symbols. A variation pattern table storing a plurality of types of variation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, a display result determination table (set value 1) shown in FIG. 8-7(A), a display result determination table (set value 2) shown in FIG. In addition to the display result determination table (setting value 3) shown in -7 (C), the big hit type determination table shown in FIG. 8-8 (A), the big hit variation pattern determination table (not shown), the small hit variation pattern determination table ( Not shown), loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 in this characteristic portion 099IW is configured such that the probability of winning a big hit (ball output rate) changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability of the big hit (ball output rate) is changed. . The setting value consists of three levels from 1 to 3, where 1 is the lowest ball payout rate, and the higher the value is in the order of 1, 2, and 3, the higher the ball payout rate is. That is, when 1 is set as the set value, the advantage for the player is the lowest, and the advantage increases stepwise as the value increases in the order of 2 and 3. It should be noted that, in this characteristic portion 099IW, the winning probability of the small win is the same regardless of the set value.

(Display result judgment table)
FIGS. 8-7 (A) to (C) are explanatory diagrams showing the display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which hit determination values to be compared with MR1 are set. In each display result determination table, the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the case where the first special symbol is subject to variable display, and the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (second) That is, for each of the cases where the second special symbols are subject to variable display, a determination value for a big hit and a determination value for a small hit are set.

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 1, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is subject to variable display In this case, a jackpot is won with a lower probability (1/320 at non-probability variation, 1/32 at probability variation) than when the set value is "2" or "3". On the other hand, some of these determination values are set as determination values corresponding to small wins, and winning of small wins has the same probability (1/99) as when the set values are ``2'' and ``3''. It is designed to Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. Even if is subject to variable display, the probability of winning a big hit is the same as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display (1/320 when non-variable, 1/32 when variable). do. On the other hand, half of these determination values are set as determination values corresponding to small hits, so that the probability (1/2) is higher than when the first special symbol is the target of variable display. It is designed to be elected.

Also, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 2, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is "1" Winning a big hit with a higher probability than in some cases (1/300 when non-variable, 1/30 when variable). On the other hand, some of these determination values are set as determination values corresponding to small wins, and the small wins are won with the same probability (1/99) as when the set values are "1" and "3". It is designed to Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. Even if is subject to variable display, the same probability as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display (1/300 when non-variable, 1/30 when variable) wins the jackpot do. On the other hand, half of these determination values are set as determination values corresponding to small hits, so that the probability is higher than the case where the first special symbol is subject to variable display, and the set value is "1" and "3", the same probability (1/2) as in the case of "1" and "3".

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (C), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3, if the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is "1", Winning a jackpot with a higher probability (1/280 at non-probability variation, 1/28 at probability variation) than in the case of "2". On the other hand, some of these determination values are set as determination values corresponding to small wins, and winning of small wins has the same probability (1/99) as when the set values are "1" and "2". It is designed to Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. Even if is subject to variable display, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display (1/280 when non-variable, 1/28 when variable). do. On the other hand, half of these determination values are set as determination values corresponding to small hits, so that the probability is higher than the case where the first special symbol is subject to variable display, and the set value is "1" and "2", the same probability (1/2) of winning a small hit.

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value set at that time, and determines whether the value of MR1 corresponds to the big hit shown in FIGS. If it matches with the hit determination value, it is determined to be a big hit (big hit type A to big hit type C) with respect to the special symbol. Also, when MR1 coincides with any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hits shown in FIGS. That is, the winning of the big win and the small win is determined with a probability corresponding to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 8-7 (A) to (C) indicates the probability (percentage) of a big win and the probability (percentage) of a small win. Determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control to the big win game state. It is also to decide whether or not to make it a big hit pattern. Determining whether or not to make a small win means determining whether or not to control to a small winning game state, but the stop at the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B It is also to determine whether or not the design is to be a small winning design.

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 8-7, regardless of the setting value, the winning probability of the small win is the same, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, similar to the probability of winning a big win, the odds of winning a small win may be increased in the order of 1, 2, and 3 as the set value increases. Further, in this case, the setting difference of the winning probability of the small win may be set to the same ratio as the setting difference of the winning probability of the big win. Specifically, if the winning probability of the small win at the setting value "1" is 1/100, the winning probability of the small win at the setting value "2" is designed to be 1/93.75, It may be set so that the winning probability of the small hit at the set value "3" is 1/87.5.

In addition, in a game machine that does not provide a small hit, the configuration shown in the characteristic portion 099IW may be applied.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 099IW, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit using the display result determination table shown in FIGS. 8-7 (A) to (C). A big-hit determination table and a small-hit determination table are separately provided, and the big-hit determination is made according to whether the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner or the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, regardless of the variable special symbol designating buffer. A common table may be used, and the small hit determination may be performed using separate tables depending on whether the variable special figure designation buffer is the first or the second buffer.

Further, in this characteristic portion 099IW, the case is shown in which the advantage increases in the order of setting value "1"<setting value "2"<setting value "3". may be configured to change. For example, it is applied to a gaming machine that is controlled to a high probability/high base state, is maintained in the high probability/high base state until the next big win occurs, and is configured so that a certain amount of prize balls can be obtained in a small win game. In this example, as shown in FIG. 8-7, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, a small hit occurs with a high probability of 1/2, and a prize ball is likely to be obtained. Therefore, in a specific game state (high probability/high base state in this example), unlike other game states, a big hit is unlikely to occur (high probability/high base state is likely to continue). A value of "1" may be the setting with the highest degree of advantage.

Also, for example, when applied to a gaming machine in which the probability variation state ends based on the execution of the variable display of a predetermined number of times (the probability variation end number) after being controlled to the probability variation state (high probability state), the same probability variation If it is the number of ending times, it may be configured such that the variable probability continuation rate (continuous home rate) increases in the order of set value "1"<set value "2"<set value "3".

In addition, in this characteristic part 099IW, a total of three setting values 1 to 3 are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko game machine The number of setting values that can be set to 1 may be two or four or more.

(Jackpot type determination table)
FIG. 8-8(A) is an explanatory diagram showing a big hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. In addition, in this characteristic part 099IW, when the jackpot type is determined using the reserved memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the first start winning hole (that is, when the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner), A common jackpot type determination table is used in the case of determining the jackpot type using the reservation memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening (that is, when the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner). Although configured to be used, different tables may be provided to determine different percentages of which jackpot types are determined.

The jackpot type determination table selects a jackpot type among jackpot types A to jackpot types C based on a random number (MR2) for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the variation display result is a jackpot pattern. It is a table referred to in order to decide either.

In the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 8-8 (A), a determination value corresponding to the random number (MR2) for jackpot type determination is assigned to each set value. Percentages of judgment values obtained are shown. In other words, the ratio of which one of the big hit types A to C is determined for each set value is shown. It should be noted that the determination value corresponding to the random number is actually assigned to the loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 8-9 and the non-reach loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. For simplicity, the percentage of assigned decision values is shown.

As shown in FIG. 8-8 (A), in the jackpot type determination table, when the setting value is "1", the ratio of being determined to the jackpot type C is high, and when the setting value is "2", When the percentage of the big hit type B is determined to be high and the setting value is "3", the determination value is assigned so that the percentage of the big hit type A to be determined is high.

Here, the jackpot type in the feature part 099IW will be explained using FIG. It is

The fanfare period is, for example, a period in which the big hit opening pre-processing of step S114 is executed on the main board 11 side, and the big hit design is stopped and displayed on the first effect control board 012IW12a and the second effect control board 012IW12b side. After that, it is a period in which a fanfare performance is executed as a performance operation for notifying the start of the jackpot game state.

The interval period is, for example, a period during which the jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed on the main board 11 side, and the big winning opening is opened on the first effect control board 012IW12a and the second effect control board 012IW12b side. It is a period in which an interval performance is executed as a performance operation for notifying the start of the next round after the round is completed.

The ending period is, for example, a period in which the big hit ending process of step S117 is executed on the main substrate 11 side, and the end of the big hit game state is notified on the first effect control board 012IW12a and the second effect control board 012IW12b side. It is a period during which the ending effect as the effect operation to be performed is executed.

As shown in FIG. 8-8 (B), the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period are the longest in the case of the jackpot type A, the second in the case of the jackpot type B, and the longest in the case of the jackpot type C. set to be short.

As described above, in this characteristic section 099IW, when the setting value is "1", the ratio of determination of the jackpot type C is high, so the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period tend to be relatively short. On the other hand, when the set value is "3", the ratio of determination of jackpot type A is high, so the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period tend to be relatively long. Therefore, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the average period of the ending period become longer in the order of the setting values "1"<"2"<"3".

This characteristic part 099IW is configured so that the probability of winning a big hit (percentage of winning balls) increases in the order of setting values "1"<"2"<"3". '<'2'<'3', the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period increases in the order. With such a configuration, when the probability of winning the jackpot (ball output rate) is set to be high, the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period can be lengthened, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed, thereby increasing gambling. can be prevented from becoming too high.

This characteristic part 099IW is configured to be able to execute a big-hit suggesting effect (details will be described later) that suggests a set value during a big-hit game. It is feasible in the period. With such a configuration, the interest in the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period can be enhanced. Also, by directing the player's interest to the effect suggesting during the big win, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the length of each period.

In the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period, a common effect may be executed regardless of the length of the set period. In this case, it is desirable that an effect (for example, display of a still image, etc.) that is difficult for the player to notice the length of the period is executed in common.

In addition, in this characteristic part 099IW, a fanfare period, an interval period and an ending period are set for each jackpot type, and the ratio of which jackpot type is determined for each setting value is different, thereby increasing the number of jackpots. When the probability of winning (percentage of winning balls) is set to be high, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the average period of the ending period are lengthened, that is, the progress of the game is delayed. A fanfare period, an interval period, and an ending period may be fixedly set for each value. Further, for example, one of a plurality of types of fanfare periods, interval periods, and ending periods having different predetermined periods may be determined by lottery. In this case, a table is used in which the judgment values are set so that the ratio of selecting the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period in which relatively long periods are set is high in the order of jackpot types A<B<C. By doing so, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the average period of the ending period can be lengthened in the order of the set values "1"<"2"<"3".

In this feature part 099IW, in any of the jackpot types A to C, the time saving control and the probability variation control executed after the end of the jackpot game state are a predetermined number of times (100 times in this feature part 099IW). It ends when the figure game is executed or the jackpot game state is entered before the special game of the predetermined number of times is executed. Alternatively, in the case of a specific jackpot type, high-precision control and time-saving control that are executed after the jackpot game state ends are continuously executed until a jackpot occurs again after the jackpot game state ends. may be made. In the case of such a specific jackpot type, a jackpot game state occurs continuously without going through the normal state, which is a so-called continuous game state. This feature part 099IW is configured so that the percentage of big hits differs for each setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, but in addition to or instead of such a configuration, the probability variable continuation for each setting value The rate (consecutive rate) may be different.

In addition, in this feature part 099IW, there is no difference in the degree of advantage between the jackpot types A to jackpot types C (for example, the number of rounds during the jackpot game, the presence or absence of time reduction control and variable probability control, the number of times of control, etc.), fanfare period, interval The period and the average period of the ending period are configured to be different, but for each jackpot type, the number of rounds during the jackpot game, the presence or absence of time reduction control and variable probability control, and the number of times of control are different, and the advantage is different. You may do so. In this case, the performance during the round may be different for each big win type, or may be the same regardless of the big win type.

In addition, in this characteristic part 099IW, according to the set value, the jackpot type when the variation display result is a jackpot is determined at different ratios from jackpot type A, jackpot type B, and jackpot type C. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the set value, one or more of the jackpot types A, jackpot types B, and jackpot types C cannot be determined. There may be more than one. In other words, if the determination ratio of the jackpot type differs according to the set value, it is possible to not determine one of the jackpot types (the determination ratio is 0%), or to set a specific jackpot type to 100%. Determining percentages is included.

In addition, in this characteristic part 099IW, the case where the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period differ according to the jackpot type is shown, but not limited to such a mode, the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending are not limited to the jackpot type. It may be configured to have different periods. For example, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period may be uniformly determined according to which of the set values "1" to "3". Further, for example, according to which of the set values "1" to "3", a lottery process is performed according to the selection probability according to the set value, and the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period are determined. You may

As described above, in this characteristic part 099IW, since the determination ratio of the jackpot type when the variable display result is a jackpot is different according to the set value, the game interest can be improved. .

In addition, in this feature part 099IW, the jackpot type is determined using MR2, which is a random number value for judging the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is the special figure display result. It may be determined using MR1, which is a random value for determination.

In addition, in this characteristic part 099IW, the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player (the higher the probability of a big hit or the probability of a small hit, and the easier it is to determine the big hit type C as a big hit type). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player.

Further, in this characteristic portion 099IW, while the jackpot probability changes according to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the game property itself does not change, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the game characteristics may be changed according to the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1 .

For example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variable state loops at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and game balls are provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a specific round during the jackpot game. Based on passing through a predetermined count switch, the game state after the end of the big win game is controlled to a probability variable state, while the rate of the game ball passing through the count switch during the big win game differs according to the big win type. When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the probability of a big hit is 1/320 and the probability of a small hit is 1/50. It may be a game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) that controls to a big hit game state based on the game ball passing through a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 during the middle). Furthermore, although the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 are 1 to 3 and the game performance is the same, the probability of a big hit or the probability of a small hit is higher than when these set values are any of 1 to 3. , a setting may be provided in which the number of winning balls that can be obtained during the big hit game is small (for example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 4).

Furthermore, in such a case where the game characteristics are changed according to the setting values, common switches may be used for different purposes. Specifically, in the above example, when the set value is 1 or 4, a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is operated as a production switch (a game ball passes through the count switch). When the set value is 2 or 3, a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a game switch (a switch for executing a predetermined effect each time a game ball is played). It may be used as a switch for controlling the game state to a variable probability state or a big hit game state based on passing through the count switch.

(Small hit type determination table)
FIG. 8-8 (C) is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. As shown in FIG. 8-8(C), in this characterizing portion 099IW, small hit types A to C are provided as small hit types. As shown in FIG. 8-8 (C), in this characteristic portion 099IW, regardless of which of the setting values "1" to "3", the determination ratio of the small hit types A to C is the same.

In addition, in this characteristic part 099IW, the opening period and the number of openings of the big winning opening during the small winning game are the same regardless of any of the small winning types A to C, and the degree of advantage in the game is the same. .

(Variation pattern judgment table)
In addition, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining a variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the variation pattern is selected from among the plurality of types described above according to the predetermined result. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns.

Specifically, as a variation pattern determination table, a big hit variation pattern determination table used when it is decided in advance that the variation display result is a "big hit", and a variation display result is set to a "small hit". A small hit variation pattern determination table used when is determined in advance and a loss variation pattern determination table used when it is determined in advance that the variation display result is "loss" are prepared in advance. .

(Loss fluctuation pattern judgment table)
FIG. 8-9 is an explanatory diagram showing a loss variation pattern determination table. In this feature part 099IW, a period from when the setting is changed when the power is turned on until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example) (hereinafter also referred to as a special period), and a period other than that ( Hereinafter, it is also referred to as a non-special period), and is configured to use a different loss variation pattern determination table.

Specifically, in the special period, the variation pattern is determined using the first losing variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 8-9 (A), and in the non-special period, shown in FIG. 8-9 (B) A variation pattern is determined using the second loss variation pattern determination table. In this characteristic part 099IW, the period from when the setting is changed when the power is turned on to when the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example) is the special period, but the present invention is limited to this. For example, the special period may be a period until the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example) regardless of whether or not the setting is changed when the power is turned on. Also, using a real-time clock 012IW126 or the like, a predetermined time period (for example, from 9:00 am to 11:00 am) may be set as a special period. Also, the period until the first big hit occurs may be set as the special period.

8-9 (A) and (B) show the first and second loss variation pattern determination tables, both set values "1" < "2" < "3" in the order of normal reach loss and super reach loss Judgment values are assigned so that the percentage is high and the percentage of non-reach failures is low. With such a configuration, the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach differs depending on the set value, so the set value is suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are executed.

In addition, the first loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 8-9 (A) has a higher percentage of normal reach loss than the second loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 8-9 (B), and the set value Judgment values are assigned so that the difference in the ratio of normal reach loss between them increases. With such a configuration, in the special period, it becomes easier to recognize the difference in the frequency of normal reach execution than in the non-special period (that is, it becomes easier to recognize the suggestion of the setting value), so the motivation to play the game during the special period can be given, and the game interest can be enhanced.

In addition, for example, the variation pattern with super reach (or a specific variation pattern thereof) is determined at the same rate regardless of the difference in the set value (or regardless of the difference between the special period and the non-special period) You may do so. By doing so, depending on the setting value, the execution ratio of only a specific variation pattern (normal reach loss in this example) will differ, and the setting value is suggested by the frequency of execution of the specific variation pattern become. In addition, conversely, the selection ratio of the variation pattern that results in super reach loss may also be varied according to the set value.

In addition, the first and second losing variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 8-9 (A) and (B) are either normal reach losing or super reach losing depending on the setting value when other than non-reach losing. Judgment values are assigned so that the ratio (that is, the balance between normal reach loss and super reach loss) is different. Specifically, in the first loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. Then, it increases by 5%), specifically, the second loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. is slightly increased (in this example, increased by 0.2%). With such a configuration, the set value is suggested by the selection tendency between the normal reach loss and the super reach loss. In addition, it is possible to increase the difference in selection tendency between the special period and the non-special period.

In this characteristic part 099IW, it is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect at different ratios depending on the setting value. It is a concept including that the execution ratio of normal reach loss and super reach loss is different depending on the set value, and that the execution ratio of only normal reach loss is different according to the set value.

In this characteristic portion 099IW, a common background image is displayed on the image display device 5 when any of the first and second loss variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 8-9 (A) and (B) is used. Then, the variable display of the decoration pattern is performed. Also, when the set value is set to any one of 1 to 3, the common background image is displayed on the image display device 5, and the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner. Note that a dedicated background image may be displayed only during a special period or during a period from when the power is turned on until the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example). With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game during the special period or the period from when the power is turned on until the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example).

In addition, not limited to the example of this characteristic portion 099IW, for example, a special variation pattern that suggests a set value (for example, a variation pattern in which the aspect of the variation display of the decorative pattern is different from the usual, and the set value 1 or 2 ) may be provided so that a special variation pattern can be selected only in a special period. With such a configuration as well, it is possible to give motivation to play a game during the special period, and to increase the interest in the game.

(Non-reach loss fluctuation pattern judgment table)
FIG. 8-10 is an explanatory diagram showing a non-reach-losing variation pattern determination table. In this feature part 099IW, a plurality of types of non-reach loss variation patterns with different variation times are provided, and when the variation pattern is determined to be non-reach loss, it is further determined whether to be non-reach loss A to C. is configured to In addition, not limited to such a configuration, for example, the loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. It may be configured to determine whether

As shown in FIG. 8-10, in the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern determination table, when the setting value is "1", the ratio of being determined to be non-reach loss C (variation time 7 seconds) is high, and the setting value is "2 ”, the percentage determined to be non-reach loss B (variation time 8 seconds) is high, and if the setting value is “3”, the percentage determined to be non-reach loss A (variation time 9 seconds) is higher is assigned a judgment value.

In this characteristic portion 099IW, when the setting value is "1", the rate of determination as non-reach loss C is high, so the variation time at the time of non-reach loss tends to be relatively short. On the other hand, when the set value is "3", the rate of determination as non-reach loss A is high, so the fluctuation time during non-reach loss tends to be relatively long. Therefore, the average fluctuation time becomes longer in the order of set values "1"<"2"<"3".

This characteristic part 099IW is configured so that the probability of winning a big hit (percentage of winning balls) increases in the order of setting values "1"<"2"<"3". '<'2'<'3'. With such a configuration, when the probability of winning the jackpot (ball output rate) is set to be high, the average fluctuation time can be lengthened, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed, and the gambling nature can be prevented from becoming too high. can be prevented.

In this feature part 099IW, depending on the set value, by differentiating the ratio of any of the non-reach loss A to C with different variation times, the average variation time is configured to be different. Variation patterns other than reach loss (for example, normal reach loss, super reach loss, etc.) may also be provided with a plurality of types so that the variation time is different, and the selected ratio may be different according to the set value. In addition, if multiple types of fluctuation patterns (for example, normal reach loss, super reach loss, etc.) are provided with different fluctuation times, the time of the swaying display of the decorative pattern and the time of high-speed fluctuation display etc. It is desirable that there is no difference in appearance.

In addition, the present characteristic portion 099IW is configured so that the average fluctuation time varies depending on the set value, but instead of or in addition to such a configuration, the final decorative pattern (final The period during which the stop symbol) is stopped and displayed may be different. With such a configuration, when the probability of winning the jackpot (ball output rate) is set to be high, it is possible to lengthen the period in which the fixed decorative pattern (final stop pattern) is stop-displayed, that is, delay the progress of the game. , it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

In addition, in this characteristic part 099IW, variable times are set for non-reach loss A to C, respectively, and the ratio of determining which of non-reach loss A to C is different for each set value, so that a big hit is won. When the probability (ball output rate) is set to be high, the average variation time is lengthened, that is, the progress of the game is delayed. may be fixedly set, and the variation time may be longer when the probability of winning the jackpot (ball output rate) is higher.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 099IW, a variation pattern for shortening whose variation time is shorter than other variation patterns is provided. For example, there is provided a variation pattern of shortened non-reach loss (variation time 1.5 seconds) whose variation time is shorter than non-reach loss A (variation time 9 seconds). This shortening variation pattern is configured to be used, for example, when the reserved storage number is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (eg, 3). With such a configuration, when the number of reserved memories reaches the upper limit or is close to the upper limit, this state is eliminated and the variable display is performed efficiently (that is, the game can be progressed efficiently). ). Therefore, it can be said that it is inappropriate to delay the progress of the game when the reserved memory number is equal to or greater than the predetermined number. Therefore, in this characteristic portion 099IW, the shortening variation pattern used when the number of pending memories is equal to or greater than the predetermined number has a common variation time regardless of the set value. Regardless of the configuration of this characteristic portion 099IW, the shortening variation pattern used when the number of reserved memories is equal to or greater than a predetermined number may also vary in variation time according to the set value.

(setting confirmation processing, setting change processing)
Next, the change of the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1 in this characterizing portion 099IW will be described. FIGS. 8-11 to 8-13 are flowcharts showing game control main processing in the characterizing part 099IW. In this characterizing portion 099IW, the processing of steps IWS001-S002 is the same as the processing of steps S1-S2 shown in FIG.

When the initial setting is performed, the CPU 103 is the time until the effect control means (specifically, the first effect control CPU 012IW 120a, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b) is activated when the power supply to the gaming machine is started. A timer for waiting for activation of the effect control means for measuring is set (step 012IWS003). In this case, sufficient time is set to the effect control means activation waiting timer from when the power supply to the game machine is started until the first effect control CPU 012IW120a and the second effect control CPU 012IW120b are activated. Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the effect control means activation wait timer (step 012IWS004), and confirms whether or not the value of the effect control means activation wait timer after the subtraction is 0 (step 012IWS005). If the value of the effect control means activation waiting timer is not 0, the process returns to step 012IWS004 and repeats the processing of steps 012IWS004 to S005. If the value of the effect control means activation waiting timer is 0, the process proceeds to step 012IWS006.

By executing the processing of steps 012IWS003 to S005, after waiting until the first production control CPU012IW120a and the second production control CPU012IW120b are started, the processing after step 012IWS006 is executed, and the setting value is changed and confirmed, and the RAM initialization and recovery processing are executed. Therefore, various commands such as set value commands, initialization commands, recovery commands, etc., which will be described later, are prevented from being transmitted before the first effect control CPU 012IW 120a and the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b are activated. It is possible to prevent commands from being missed.

Next, the CPU 103 resets the RAM clear flag indicating that the clear switch has been pressed when the game machine is powered on (step 012IWS006).

In this example, the RAM clear flag is not cleared in the later-described power-off processing (see step 012IWS031), and the RAM clear flag is once cleared by step 012IWS006 when the gaming machine is powered on, and then the clear switch is set. If so, the RAM clear flag is newly set (see steps 012, IWS016, and S022), but the configuration is not limited to this. For example, if the RAM clear flag is also cleared when power-off processing is executed, and then the clear switch is set when the game machine is powered on, the RAM clear flag is set anew. good too.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) by the same process as in step S4 (step 012IWS007). Specifically, at step 012IWS007, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the backup flag is ON. If the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step 012IWS007; No), the process proceeds to step 012IWS012.

If backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step 012IWS007; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a data check of the backed up data (using an error detection code) in the same manner as in step S5 to determine whether the data is normal. (Step 012IWS008). At step 012IWS008, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time when the power supply was stopped, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal. If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step 012IWS008; No), the process proceeds to step 012IWS010.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step 012IWS008; Yes), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the setting value stored in the RAM 102 is a value other than the setting values "1" to "3". (step 012IWS009). If the set value stored in the RAM 102 is one of the set values "1" to "3", the process proceeds to step 012IWS011.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (N at step 012IWS008) or if it is determined that the set value stored in the RAM 102 is a value other than the set values "1" to "3" (Y at step 012IWS009) Then, the CPU 103 sets a RAM abnormality flag indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the RAM 102 (step 012IWS010). Then, the process proceeds to step 012IWS012.

If the setting value stored in the RAM 102 is one of the setting values "1" to "3" (N in step 012IWS009), the CPU 103 is executing setting change processing for changing the setting value. It is checked whether or not a setting change flag indicating that the setting is being changed is set (step 012IWS011). If the setting change flag is set (step 012IWS011; Yes), that is, if the power supply to the game machine is restarted due to power failure during the change of the setting value, the process proceeds to step 012IWS012.

At step 012IWS012, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door opening sensor 012IW090 is on (step 012IWS012). If the output signal from the door open sensor 012IW090 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting key 012IW051 is on (step 012IWS013). If the setting key 012IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 012IWS014). If the output signal from the clear switch is on, the CPU 103 executes RAM clear 2 processing (step 012IWS015).

In this example, the RAM clear processing includes RAM clear 1 processing (see step 012IWS051) and RAM clear 2 processing (see step 012IWS015) which is executed when a RAM error occurs.

In the RAM clear 1 process, the CPU 103 clears the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area. However, in the RAM clear 1 process, the memory area of the RAM 102 other than the area for storing performance display information such as continuous ratio, role ratio, base, etc., and the area for storing setting values is cleared. Performance display information such as role ratios and bases, and set value information are retained without being cleared. The storage area of the RAM 102 cleared by the RAM clear 1 process is hereinafter referred to as a clear storage area 1 .

In the RAM clear 2 process, the CPU 103 clears the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area. However, in the RAM clear 2 process, the memory area of the RAM 102 other than the area for storing performance display information such as continuous ratio, role ratio, and base is cleared, and performance display such as continuous ratio, role ratio, and base is cleared. information is retained without being cleared. In addition, in the RAM clear 2 process, the set values stored in the RAM 102 are also cleared. The storage area of the RAM 102 cleared by the RAM clear 2 process is hereinafter referred to as a clear storage area 2 . Therefore, in this example, the clear storage area 2 of the RAM 102 cleared by the RAM clear 2 process is wider than the clear storage area 1 of the RAM 102 cleared by the RAM clear 1 process.

Then, the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag (step 012IWS016) and proceeds to step 012IWS025. Note that the RAM clear flag is set in the clear storage area 2 of the RAM 102 .

On the other hand, if the output signal from the door open sensor 012IW090 is off (N at step 012IWS012), if the setting key 012IW051 is off (N at step 012IWS013), or if the output signal from the clear switch is off ( At step 012IWS014 N), the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a set value abnormality error command to the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b (step 012IWS017).

Next, the CPU 103 shifts to the loop processing of steps 012IWS018 to S020. In the loop processing, the CPU 103 executes 4ms wait processing for measuring a 4ms wait time (step 012IWS018). Then, after the wait time of 4 ms has elapsed, the CPU 103 shifts to step 012IWS019 and displays a predetermined error (step 012IWS019). For example, the CPU 103 performs control to display a display indicating a RAM abnormality error (for example, display of "E") on the display monitor 012IW029. Further, the CPU 103 performs control for externally outputting a security signal to an external device such as a hall computer through the external terminal board (step 012IWS020). Then, the processing after step 012IWS018 is repeatedly executed.

By executing the processing of steps 012IWS007 to S020, in this characteristic part 099IW, if the backup RAM is not normal (N in steps 012IWS007 and S008, Y in step 012IWS009), or if a power failure occurs during setting change. If (Y in step 012IWS011), the setting key 012IW051 is turned on and the clear switch is turned on while the frame 012IW003 for the gaming machine is opened. can be changed. On the other hand, unless the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is opened and the setting key 012IW051 and the clear switch are turned on, loop processing is executed, setting values cannot be changed, and game control does not proceed.

If the setting changing flag is not set (step 012IWS011; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 012IWS021). If the output signal from the clear switch is on, the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag (step 012IWS022).

In this example, the processing of steps 012IWS022 and 012IWS016 is executed to set the RAM clear flag when the turning-on of the clear switch is first detected when the game machine is powered on. Then, after that, until the timer interrupt is set and the timer interrupt processing (game control processing) is started, there are multiple scenes to check whether the clear switch is turned on when the power is turned on. However, rather than directly confirming the state of the clear switch, it is determined whether or not the clear switch is turned on when the power is turned on by confirming whether or not the RAM clear flag is set. (See step 012 IWS025, S034, S048).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door opening sensor 012IW090 is ON (step 012IWS023). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 012IW090 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting key 012IW051 is on (step 012IWS024). If the setting key 012IW051 is on, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the RAM clear flag is set (step 012IWS025). If the RAM clear flag is not set, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a setting confirmation command indicating that the setting confirmation process for confirming the setting value is executed to the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b (step 012IWS026 ). Then, the process proceeds to step 012IWS030.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear flag is set, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a setting change command indicating that the setting change process for changing the setting value is executed to the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b ( step 012 IWS 027). Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the RAM abnormality flag is set (step 012IWS028). If the RAM anomaly flag is set (that is, if an anomaly of the RAM 102 is detected), the CPU 103 writes The set value is set to "1" (step 012IWS029). Then, the process proceeds to step 012IWS030. At this time, the CPU 103 resets the RAM abnormality flag.

In addition, on the side of the first effect control board 012IW12a and the second effect control board 012IW12b, when a setting confirmation command or a setting change command is received, control is performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or the setting is being changed (for example, , a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a decorative luminous body such as a decorative LED emits light in a predetermined manner). In this case, when the operation buttons for effects such as the push button 31B are pressed on the side of the first effect control board 012IW12a and the second effect control board 012IW12b, a message such as "maintenance mode" is displayed and the maintenance mode is entered. It may be configured to The "maintenance mode" includes, for example, the date and time setting of the real-time clock 012IW126, the history of various errors (a record of when and what kind of error occurred), and the history of setting changes (when the set value was changed and after the change). This is a mode that allows you to check the recording of set values for When the setting key 012IW051 is turned off and the setting confirmation process and the setting change process are completed, the maintenance mode is also terminated.

Next, the CPU 103 executes 4ms wait processing for measuring a 4ms wait time (step 012IWS030). Then, after the wait time of 4 ms has elapsed, the CPU 103 shifts to step 012IWS031 and executes power-off processing (step 012IWS031). In the power-off process of step 012IWS031, the CPU 103 executes a process of detecting whether or not a power-off signal has been output (whether or not the power has turned on). The power-off signal is output when, for example, a power monitoring circuit mounted on the power board detects a drop in the voltage of the power supplied to the gaming machine. In the power-off process, when the CPU 103 detects that the power-off signal has been output, the CPU 103 executes the power-supply-off process for saving necessary data (eg, backup flag, checksum) in the backup RAM area. do.

Next, the CPU 103 identifies the set values stored in the set value determination buffer, and displays the identified set values on the display monitor 012IW029 (step 012IWS032). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to externally output a security signal to an external device such as a hall computer through the external terminal board (step 012IWS033).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the RAM clear flag is set (step 012IWS034). If the RAM clear flag is not set, the process proceeds directly to step 012IWS043.

If the RAM clear flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the setting changing flag (step 012IWS035) and starts setting change processing. Next, it is checked whether or not the initial setting completion flag indicating that the value has already been set to the clear switch buffer for the first time since the gaming machine was turned on is set (step 012IWS036). The clear switch buffer is provided in the RAM 102 and is a buffer for setting the input state of the clear switch (whether it is on or off). For example, the clear switch buffer is set to a value of "1" when the clear switch is on, and set to a value of "0" when the clear switch is off. If the initial setting completion flag is set (if the value has already been set to the clear switch buffer for the first time since the game machine was turned on), the process proceeds directly to step 012IWS039.

If the initial set flag has not been set (that is, if no value has been set in the clear switch buffer since the gaming machine was turned on), the CPU 103 turns on the clear switch buffer. The indicated value (for example, "1") is set (step 012IWS037). Also, the CPU 103 sets an initial setting flag (step 012IWS038).

Next, the CPU 103 sets the value currently set in the clear switch buffer to the previous clear switch buffer (step 012IWS039). The previous clear switch buffer is provided in the RAM 102 and is a buffer for setting the input state (on state or off state) of the clear switch confirmed last time (4 ms ago in this example). For example, the previous clear switch buffer is set to a value of "1" if the previously confirmed clear switch is in the ON state, and is set to a value of "0" if it is in the OFF state.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms the current input state of the clear switch and sets the current input state of the clear switch in the clear switch buffer (step 012IWS040). Next, the CPU 103 determines that the value previously set in the clear switch buffer is in the off state (eg, "0") and the value set in the clear switch buffer is in the on state (eg, "1"). is confirmed (step 012IWS041).

If the value set in the previous clear switch buffer is OFF and the value set in the clear switch buffer is ON, the CPU 103 updates the set value displayed on the display monitor 012IW029. It is displayed and stored in the setting value determination buffer (updating and storing the already stored setting values) (step 012IWS042). For example, when "1" is displayed as the setting value on the display monitor 012IW029, the display of the display monitor 012IW029 is updated to "2", and the setting value determination buffer stores the setting value "2". Also, when "2" is displayed as the setting value on the display monitor 012IW029, the display on the display monitor 012IW029 is updated to "3", and the setting value determination buffer stores the setting value "3". Also, when "3" is displayed as the setting value on the display monitor 012IW029, the display of the display monitor 012IW029 is updated to "1", and the setting value "1" is stored in the setting value determination buffer.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting key 012IW051 is on (step 012IWS043). If the setting key 012IW051 remains ON, the process proceeds to step 012IWS030, the processing of steps 012IWS030 to S043 is repeatedly executed, and the setting confirmation processing and setting change processing are repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the setting key 012IW051 is off, the CPU 103 ends the setting confirmation process and setting change process, and proceeds to step 012IWS044.

By executing the processing of steps 012IWS025 to S043, if the RAM clear flag is not set (that is, if the clear switch is not turned on when the game machine is turned on) (steps 012IWS025, S034 (N), a setting confirmation command is transmitted (step 012IWS026), and only setting confirmation processing (especially step 012IWS032) is performed, and setting change processing is not performed. On the other hand, if the RAM clear flag is set (that is, if the clear switch is turned on when the gaming machine is turned on) (step 012IWS025, Y in S034), a setting change command is transmitted (step 012IWS027). At the same time, setting confirmation processing (especially step 012IWS032) and setting change processing (especially 012IWS035 to S042) are performed.

Next, the CPU 103 sets a predetermined value (for example, a value corresponding to 30 seconds) to the security information timer for setting the output period of the security signal (step 012IWS044). In this example, when the setting confirmation process and the setting change process are executed when the gaming machine is powered on, the process of step 012IWS033 is executed to start the external output of the security signal. , a security information timer is set in step 012IWS044, and information output processing (step S23) is executed based on the value of the security information timer, whereby the security signal continues until a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) elapses. and output to the outside.

On the other hand, in this example, by executing the processing of step 012IWS020, a security signal is output to the outside even when a RAM abnormality or the like occurs. The security signal is continuously output to the outside until the

Next, the CPU 103 resets the setting changing flag (step 012IWS045). Also, the CPU 103 erases the set values displayed on the display monitor 012IW029 (step 012IWS046). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a set value command indicating the set set value to the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b (step 012IWS047).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the RAM clear flag is set (step 012IWS048). If the RAM clear flag is not set, the process proceeds to step 012 IWS049 for recovery processing. The processing of steps 012IWS049 and S050 in this characteristic portion 099IW is the same as the processing of steps S6 and S7 shown in FIG.

If the RAM clear flag is set, the CPU 103 executes RAM clear 1 processing to clear the clear storage area 1 of the RAM 102 (012IWS051). The processing of steps 012IWS052 to S055 in this characteristic portion 099IW is the same as the processing of steps S9 to S12 shown in FIG.

FIG. 8-14 is an explanatory diagram showing the processing executed when the power is turned on. As shown in FIG. 8-14, in this characteristic part 099IW, when the setting key 012IW051 is on when the power is turned on (and when the output signal from the door open sensor 012IW090 is on), the clear switch is turned on. If so, setting confirmation processing (especially step 012IWS032) and setting change processing (especially 012IWS035 to S042) are executed, and initialization processing (RAM clear 1 processing (step 012IWS051)) is executed. For example, only the setting confirmation process (especially step 012IWS032) is executed and the recovery process (step 012IWS049) is executed. If the setting key 012IW051 is off when the power is turned on, if the clear switch is on, only the initialization process (RAM clear 1 process (step 012IWS051)) is executed. Only recovery processing (step 012IWS049) is executed.

Next, the display mode of the display monitor 012IW029 in the setting confirmation process and the setting change process will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 8-15 (A) and 8-15 (B), when the power is turned off (powered off) by the operation of a game hall clerk or the like, the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped. The display on the display monitor 012IW029 ends when the supply stops. If the big winning opening is open during the big winning game or the small winning game at the timing of turning off the power, the big winning opening is closed by stopping the power supply to the solenoid 82 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-15 (C), when the game arcade clerk or the like operates the clear switch and turns on the power (if Yes in step S3 of the game control main processing), the setting key 012IW051 is turned ON. The setting confirmation process is executed by the CPU 103 on the condition that it is, and the setting values stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 are displayed on the display monitor 012IW029.

In this state where the setting values are displayed on the display monitor 012IW029, as shown in FIG. Each time, the numerical values displayed on the display monitor 012IW029 are sequentially updated (for example, updated in the order of 1→2→3→1→ . . . each time the clear switch is operated). In addition, the setting values displayed on the display monitor 012IW029 are stored (updated) in the backup area of the RAM 102 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-15(E), the CPU 103 turns off the display monitor 012IW029 based on the fact that the setting key 012IW051 has been turned off by the operation of the game hall clerk or the like, thereby turning off the game hall. The store clerk or the like is notified that the new set values have been stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 .

Also, if the reserve memory is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, the reserve memory is cleared. Also, when the big winning opening is closed at the timing of FIG. 8-15 (A) (the timing when the pachinko game machine 1 is powered off), RAM clear processing is executed when the setting is changed. Since the memory related to the big win is erased, the big prize opening remains closed. After that, the CPU 103 ends the setting change processing, and enters a state in which a game can be performed, that is, a state in which a variation display result, a jackpot type, a lottery for determination of a variation pattern, payout of prize balls, and the like can be executed.

In addition, in the setting change processing in this characteristic part 099IW, as an initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 012IW029, a mode of displaying the setting values stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is exemplified, but the present invention is limited to this. As an initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 012IW029 in the setting change process, the most disadvantageous setting value for the player ("1" for this characteristic portion 099IW) or the most advantageous setting value for the player A set value ("3" for this characteristic portion 099IW) may be displayed.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 8-15, the case of displaying the setting value using the first display of the four-digit display of the display monitor 012IW029 when confirming or changing the setting value was shown. For example, the setting values may be displayed using the second and subsequent displays of the display monitor 012IW029. Further, for example, the setting value may be displayed by performing a dedicated 4-digit display on the display monitor 012IW029. In this case, for example, if the set value is "1", the display monitor 012IW029 displays "-S-1" in four digits, or if the set value is "2", the display monitor 012IW029 displays "-S-2". , or if the set value is "3", the display monitor 012IW029 may display "-S-3" in four digits. Further, for example, the setting value may be displayed on all four digits of the display monitor 012IW029. For example, if the setting value is "1", the display monitor 012IW029 displays 4 digits "1111", and if the setting value is "2", the display monitor 012IW029 displays 4 digits "2222". may

(Special pattern normal processing)
Next, the processing of the special symbol normal processing (step S110) in this characterizing portion 099IW will be described. FIGS. 8-16 and 8-17 are flowcharts showing special symbol normal processing (step S110) in special symbol process processing. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total reserved memory number (the total number of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number) (step 012IWS171). For example, it checks the count value of a total pending storage number counter for counting the total pending storage number.

If the total reserved storage number is not 0, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the second reserved storage number is 0 (step 012IWS172). For example, it is checked whether the count value of the second reserved storage number counter for counting the second reserved storage number is 0 or not. If the second reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 103 is a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol). is set with data indicating "second" (step 012 IWS 173). If the second reserved memory number is 0, the CPU 103 sets data indicating "first" to the special symbol pointer (step 012IWS174).

By executing the processing of steps 012IWS172 to S174, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special symbol in the characteristic portion 099IW. In addition, not limited to such a mode, for example, according to the starting winning order in which the game ball wins in the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol and may be configured to execute

Next, the CPU 103 reads each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 102 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 012 IWS 175). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores each random value stored in the saving area corresponding to the first reserved storage number=1 in the first reserved storage buffer is read out and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 . Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads out each random value stored in the saving area corresponding to the second reserved memory number=1 in the second reserved memory buffer. Stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 .

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 012IWS176). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first reserved storage number counter, and the number of storage areas in the first reserved storage buffer Shift content. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", 1 is subtracted from the count value of the second reserved storage number counter, and the contents of each storage area in the second reserved storage buffer are shifted.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103, in the first reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102, saves the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) Each stored random value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number=n−1. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", each stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reservation storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reservation storage buffer of the RAM 102 Store the random value in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number=n-1.

Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number (or each second reserved memory number) is extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or 2nd reserved storage number)=1, 2, 3, 4.

Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the total pending storage number by one. That is, 1 is subtracted from the count value of the total pending storage number counter (step 012IWS177). Note that the CPU 103 saves the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 .

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a set value command indicating the set value set in the RAM 102 to the second effect control board 012IW12b (step 012IWS178). As already described, in this characteristic unit 112, the processing of step 012IWS047 is executed to transmit the set value command when the setting change processing is executed when the power is turned on. A set value command is transmitted each time the variable display is started by executing the processing of 012IWS 178 .

In this example, the same set value command is sent when the set value command is sent in step 012IWS047 and when the set value command is sent in step 012IWS178. It may be configured to send commands. For example, in step 012IWS047, a command for directly specifying a setting value (for example, commands 9E01(H) to 9E03(H) according to setting values "1" to "3") is transmitted, while in step 012IWS178, a setting value is specified. It may be configured to transmit an identifiable variation pattern command and prepare as many variation pattern commands as the set value (for example, at the set value “1”, command 1C00 (H) ~ is prepared as the variation pattern command. , Commands 2C00(H) and so forth may be prepared as variation pattern commands at the set value "2", and commands 3C00(H) and so forth may be prepared as variation pattern commands at the set value "3".

In addition, in the case of the above configuration, even if the same variation pattern is used, if it is configured to transmit a different variation pattern command for each set value, the total number of variation patterns x the number of set values (3 in this example) ) worth of variation pattern commands are required, and there is a risk that the data capacity will increase. Therefore, for example, a set value command is transmitted only when a specific variation pattern is used, and only the variation pattern command corresponding to the specific variation pattern is provided with the variation pattern command for the number of set values. good. In this case, for example, the set value command is transmitted only when the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation with the highest output frequency is used, and only the fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation is the fluctuation pattern command for the number of set values may be provided.

In addition, in this example, the case where the same set value command is sent as the set value command (see step 012IWS047) sent when power is turned on and the set value command sent when fluctuation starts (see step 012IWS178) was shown. It is not limited to any form. For example, a set value command for when power is turned on and a set value command for when fluctuation starts may be configured as separate commands so that different set value commands are sent when power is turned on and when fluctuation starts. good.

Also, in this example, a case is shown in which the set value command is transmitted separately from the variation pattern command at the start of variation. good too. In this case, for example, even if the variation pattern command specifies the same variation pattern A, if the set value is "1", the variation pattern command A-1 is transmitted, and if the set value is "2" A variation pattern command A-2 may be transmitted, and if the set value is "3", a variation pattern command A-3 may be transmitted.

In addition, regardless of the setting value on the game control microcomputer 100 side, the same variation pattern command (for example, variation pattern command A) can be configured to output, and the first effect control CPU012IW120a and the second effect control CPU012IW120b side It may be configured such that which variation pattern is selected or the selection ratio is varied depending on whether the set value is . For example, if the setting value is 1, the variation pattern A-1 is selected or the variation pattern A-1 is selected at a high rate, or if the setting value is 2, the variation pattern A-2 is selected or the variation pattern A-2 is high Alternatively, if the set value is 3, the variation pattern A-3 may be selected or the variation pattern A-3 may be selected at a high percentage. In this case, for example, the variation patterns A-1 to A-3 have the same variation time, but may differ in the presence/absence of pseudo-runs, the number of pseudo-runs, and the presence/absence and type of reach. Further, in this case, for example, when the setting value command cannot be received normally, the variation pattern A-1 is uniformly selected, or when the setting value command is not normally received, the selection ratio dedicated to may be configured to select a variation pattern with .

Also, in this example, the case where the set value command is transmitted at the start of fluctuation has been shown, but the configuration is not limited to such a mode, and for example, the set value command may be transmitted at the end of fluctuation.

Further, the CPU 103 performs control for transmitting a background designation command to the second effect control board 012IW12b according to the current game state (step 012IWS179). In this case, the CPU 103, for example, performs control to transmit the probability variable state background designation command in the case of the probability variable state, and performs control to transmit the time reduction state background designation command in the case of the time saving state, and is in the normal state In this case, control is performed to send a normal state background designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 reads the random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination from the random number buffer area, and executes the big hit determination module. The big hit determination module compares a predetermined big hit determination value or small hit determination value (see FIG. 8-7) with the random number MR1, and if they match, determines a big hit or a small hit. is the program to run. That is, it is a program for executing the processing of big hit determination and small hit determination.

If the value of the random number MR1 does not match any of the big hit determination values (N of step 012IWS180), the CPU 103 performs a small hit determination process (step 012IWS181). Then, when it is determined to be a small win (Y in step 012IWS181), the CPU 103 sets a small win flag indicating a small win (step 012IWS182), and proceeds to step 012IWS186.

If the value of the random number MR1 does not coincide with either the big-hit determination value or the small-hit determination value (N in step 012IWS181), that is, if it is a loss, the process proceeds directly to step 012IWS186.

If the value of the random number MR1 matches any of the jackpot determination values (Y in step 012IWS180), the CPU 103 sets a jackpot flag indicating a jackpot (step 012IWS183). Next, the CPU 103 uses the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 8-8) to determine the type ("jackpot type A , "jackpot type B" or "jackpot type C") is determined as the jackpot type (step 012 IWS 184).

Further, the CPU 103 sets data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 (step 012IWS185). For example, when the jackpot type is "jackpot type A", "01" is set as the data indicating the jackpot type, and when the jackpot type is "jackpot type B", "02" is set as the data indicating the jackpot type. When the jackpot type is "jackpot type C", "03" is set as data indicating the jackpot type.

Next, the CPU 103 determines the stop symbol of the special symbol (step 012IWS186). For example, when neither the big-hit flag nor the small-hit flag is set, the winning symbol "-" is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol. Further, for example, when the big hit flag is set, the big hit symbol "7" is determined as the special symbol stop symbol. It should be noted that a different special symbol stop symbol may be determined according to the type of the big hit. Further, for example, when the small hit flag is set, the small hit symbol "5" is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S111) (step 012IWS187).

(Production control main processing)
Next, the operation of the effect control means in this characterizing portion 099IW will be described. FIG. 8-18(A) is a flow chart showing the effect control main processing in the characteristic portion 099IW.

In the effect control main process, first, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not a power-off signal is input from the power monitoring circuit 099IW127 (step 099IWS001). When the power interruption signal is input (Y of step 099IWS001), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b determines that the power interruption of the game machine itself has occurred (that is, the game machine itself has been restarted), It waits until the input of the power-off signal is stopped (N of step 099IWS002). Then, when the input of the power-off signal is stopped (Y of step 099IWS002), the process proceeds to step 099IWS201.

If the power off signal has not been input from the beginning of the process (Y in step 099IWS001), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b has generated a system reset of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b (that is, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b alone is restarted), the date and time information is input from the real-time clock 012IW 126, and the input date and time information is executed as the system reset date and time of the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b (step 012IWS003). ). Then, the process proceeds to step 099 IWS 201 .

In this characteristic portion 099IW, the processing of steps 099IWS201-S202 is the same as the processing of steps S71-S72 shown in FIG. It should be noted that, in this characteristic portion 099IW, in the initialization processing of step 099IWS 201, control is performed to display an initial image on the image display device 5 (any image that enables recognition that the gaming machine is operating). , Not limited to such a configuration, control to display the initial image on the image display device 5 only when it is determined that the system reset of the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b has occurred, or when the game machine itself restarts When it is determined that only the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b has restarted, by performing control to display different initial images, the activation history (i.e., the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b system reset, etc. has occurred) can be recognized at a glance.

When the initial operation control process of step 012IWS202 is executed, the second effect control CPU012IW120b has not determined that the system reset of the second effect control CPU012IW120b has occurred (step 012IWS203 N), the date and time from the real time clock 012IW126 Information is input, and log information storage processing including the input date and time information as the power-on date and time is executed (step 012 IWS 204).

By executing the processing of steps 012IWS003 and 012IWS204, the data indicating the log information including the system reset date and time or the power-on date and time is stored in the log areas provided in the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14. is written and stored as The second effect control CPU 012IW120b transmits a control signal corresponding to the backup command for power-on to the backup memory board 099IW14 via the serial communication circuit 099IW137. In the backup memory board 099IW14, the memory controller 099IW200 responds to the backup command indicated by the control signal received via the serial communication circuit 099IW202, and writes the log information including the system reset date and time or the power-on date and time. .

In this characteristic part 099IW, in the production control main process, the second production control CPU 012IW120b has a power interruption of the game machine itself if a power supply interruption signal is input from the power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127 at the start of control ( That is, the gaming machine itself is restarted), and the start of control waits until the input of the power-off signal stops (Y in step 099IWS001, corresponding to the process of 099IWS002). Then, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b executes a process of storing log information including the power-on date and time (corresponding to the process of step 099IWS204). In addition, when power failure occurs in the game machine itself (that is, when the game machine itself is restarted), the main board 11 issues a setting change command, a setting confirmation command, an initialization command, a recovery command, and other power-on commands. is transmitted, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b executes processing based on those commands (e.g., corresponding to processing such as steps 012IWS802, 012IWS805, and 012IWS809 described later). Furthermore, the storage processing of the log information including the date and time of the power failure (for example, corresponding to the processing of step 012 IWS847 described later) is also executed.

On the other hand, in the effect control main process, if the power supply disconnection signal is not input from the power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127 at the start of control, the second effect control CPU012IW120b has generated a system reset of the second effect control CPU012IW120b ( That is, only the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b is restarted), and the log information including the system reset date and time is stored in the log area without waiting for the start of control (corresponding to the processing of step 099IWS003). When the system reset etc. of the second effect control CPU012IW120b occurs (that is, only the second effect control CPU012IW120b is restarted), the setting change command and setting confirmation command from the main board 11, the initialization designation command, the command at the time of recovery Since the command at the time of power-on such as is not transmitted, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b does not execute processing based on those commands. In addition, the storage processing of log information including the date and time of power-on and the storage processing of log information including the date and time of power failure are not executed.

Thus, in this characteristic portion 099IW, at the start of the control of the second effect control CPU012IW120b (that is, when it becomes operable), power failure of the game machine itself (that is, restart of the game machine itself), the second It is possible to specify which of the system reset of the effect control CPU012IW120b (that is, the restart of only the second effect control CPU012IW120b) has occurred. Then, when the system reset of the second effect control CPU012IW120b occurs, while executing the storage process of log information including the system reset date and time, the process of waiting for the start of control (Y of step 099IWS001, 099IWS002) and the power supply Even if it is necessary at the time of power failure of the game machine itself, such as storage processing of log information including input date and time (step 099IWS204), storage processing of log information including power failure date and time (step 012IWS847 described later), second effect control Unnecessary processing is not executed at the time of system reset of the CPU 012IW 120b. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately determine the situation when the power is turned on, and to execute optimum processing according to the situation.

In this characteristic part 099IW, in the backup data memories 099IW 210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW 14, as log areas for recording log information, there are a first log area for recording log information for game shops and a first log area for recording log information for game machine manufacturers. is configured to provide a second log area for recording. Then, when power failure occurs in the gaming machine itself, a storage process is executed to store log information including the power-on date and time and power failure date/time information in the first log area (steps 012IWS204 and 012IWS847). processing). On the other hand, when the system reset of the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b occurs instead of the power failure of the game machine itself, the log information including the system reset date and time is stored in the second log area (step 012IWS003).

In this characteristic part 099IW, for the log information recorded in the second log area, an inspection device is connected to the pachinko game machine 1, and between the inspection device and the second performance control CPU 012IW120b of the second performance control board 012IW12b , are read out by inputting and outputting inspection signals. In other words, it has output means for outputting log information that can identify the activation history. With such a configuration, the log information including the system reset date and time can be used as information for development and debugging by game machine manufacturers.

There are various types of log information to be backed up, such as system data, effect control error data, received command data, etc. In this example, the first log area is displayed as history information in maintenance mode. Log information is stored. For example, log information such as power-on date and time, setting change start date and time, setting confirmation start date and time, and RAM clear date and time are stored (portions that execute processes such as steps 099IWS204, 012IWS802, 012IWS805, and 012IWS809. 8-47).

On the other hand, the second log area stores log information used as information for development and debugging. For example, log information such as system reset date and time, exceptional event information, received command data, etc., which will be described later, is stored (portion for executing processes such as steps 099IWS003 and 099IWS42).

In addition, in this characteristic part 099IW, the log information recorded in the second log area is not displayed as history information on the maintenance history screen in the maintenance mode. Part or all of the log information (excluding log information that overlaps with the log information recorded in the first log area) may be displayed as history information on the maintenance history screen in the maintenance mode.

Also, for example, when the system reset of the second effect control CPU012IW120b occurs, such as when a predetermined backup condition is established, the log information is stored in both the first log area and the second log area. You may make it perform a process. The division of log information stored in the first log area and the second log area is not limited to the configuration of this example. Also, three or more log areas may be provided.

Also, the backup method may be different between the first log area and the second log area. For example, when the backup method is batch backup, data to be backed up by one backup is stored in interrupt processing based on the occurrence of one timer interrupt processing for effect control, and when the backup method is divided backup. , data to be backed up by one backup is stored in interrupt processing based on the occurrence of the timer interrupt processing for performance control a plurality of times. In this way, by properly using the backup method, it is possible to suitably perform backup according to the log information.

Also, the backup multiplicity may be different between the first log area and the second log area. The degree of multiplicity is the degree of mirroring in which data to be backed up that indicates the same log information is stored in a plurality of different log areas in an overlapping and distributed manner. You can specify the number of times. For example, when the multiplicity is "1", the data to be backed up indicating the same log information is stored and backed up only once without performing mirroring. When the multiplicity is "2", mirroring is performed with the number of times of storage being two, and backup target data indicating the same log information is stored twice in different storage areas and backed up. When the multiplicity is "3", mirroring is performed with a storage count of 3, and the backup target data indicating the same log information is stored 3 times in different storage areas and backed up. By increasing the degree of multiplicity, redundancy (availability) can be improved and the reliability of stored data can be enhanced.

8-19 show execution examples of backup processing with different degrees of multiplicity. The second effect control CPU012IW120b has functions of memory write processing units 43AKM11 and 43AKM12 and functions of event information creation processing units 43AKM21 and 43AKM22 by executing a program read from ROM012IW121b. The backup data memories 099IW210A to 210C of the backup memory board 099IW14 are provided with the backup storage units 43AKA11 to 43AKA13 as well as the backup storage unit 43AKA21. The backup storage unit 43AKA11 includes backup storage areas 43AKA111 to 43AKA113 as log areas, the backup storage unit 43AKA12 includes backup storage areas 43AKA121 to 43AKA123 as log areas, and the backup storage unit 43AKA13 includes log areas. as backup storage areas 43AKA131 to 43AKA133. On the other hand, the backup storage unit 43AKA21 has backup storage areas 43AKA211 to 43AKA213 as log areas.

Occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKM21 creates backup data corresponding to the case where a backup condition with a multiplicity of "3" is satisfied. The memory write processing unit 43AKM11 acquires the backup data created by the event information creation processing unit 43AKM21. The backup data acquired at this time is transferred to the backup memory board 099IW14 and stored in the log areas of the backup storage units 43AKA11 to 43AKA13. In the three backup storage units 43AKA11 to 43AKA13, the same backup data created by the event information creation processing unit 43AKM21 are stored in a distributed manner while overlapping. For example, the backup data first acquired from the event information creation processing unit 43AKM21 is stored in the backup storage area 43AKA111 of the backup storage unit 43AKA11, the backup storage area 43AKA121 of the backup storage unit 43AKA12, and the backup storage area 43AKA131 of the backup storage unit 43AKA13. , is stored by copying and writing. The backup data acquired next from the event information creation processing unit 43AKM21 are stored in the backup storage area 43AKA112 of the backup storage unit 43AKA11, the backup storage area 43AKA122 of the backup storage unit 43AKA12, and the backup storage area 43AKA132 of the backup storage unit 43AKA13. It is memorized by copying and writing. The backup data acquired next from the event information creation processing unit 43AKM21 are the backup storage area 43AKA113 of the backup storage unit 43AKA11, the backup storage area 43AKA123 of the backup storage unit 43AKA12, and the backup storage area 43AKA133 of the backup storage unit 43AKA13. is stored by copying and writing to .

Occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKM22 creates backup data corresponding to the case where a backup condition with a multiplicity of "1" is satisfied. The memory write processing unit 43AKM12 acquires the backup data created by the event information creation processing unit 43AKM22. The backup data acquired at this time is transferred to the backup memory board 099IW14 and stored in the log area of the backup storage unit 43AKA21. Also, when the multiplicity is "1", mirroring is not performed and single backup data is stored without distribution. For example, the backup data first obtained from the event information creation processing unit 43AKM22 is stored by writing it to the backup storage area 43AKA211 of the backup storage unit 43AKA21 without copying. The backup data acquired next from the event information creation processing unit 43AKM22 is stored by writing it to the backup storage area 43AKA212 of the backup storage unit 43AKA21 without copying. The next backup data acquired from the event information creation processing unit 22 is stored by writing it to the backup storage area 43AKA213 of the backup storage unit 43AKA21 without copying.

The log information recorded in the second log area is not displayed as history information on the maintenance history screen in the maintenance mode. For example, since it cannot be confirmed without using a dedicated inspection device, some log information may be missing. However, the log information recorded in the first log area is displayed as history information on the maintenance history screen in the maintenance mode. , it is desirable to ensure that backups are performed.

However, for example, some or all of the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14 are configured using a nonvolatile ferroelectric memory such as FRAM (registered trademark) (Ferroelectric RAM), and the serial communication circuit 099IW137 and serial communication If the communication data is transmitted and received by the serial communication method via the circuit 099IW 202 (for example, the communication speed is slower than that of the bus connection method), increasing the degree of multiplicity and backing up It may take some time for the backup to complete. Then, in a situation where a predetermined error has occurred, when the manager of the gaming parlor immediately restarts the gaming machine, the predetermined error is not recorded as log information (that is, it is displayed as history information on the maintenance history screen). not be accepted), which may give rise to a sense of distrust.

Therefore, for the log information to be stored in the first log area, the multiplicity of backup is set to "1", and the data to be backed up indicating the log information is stored and backed up only once. The log information to be stored in the second log area is configured to be backed up by setting the backup multiplicity to "2" or "3" and storing the backup target data indicating the log information only two or three times. . Alternatively, the method of backing up the first log area may be a batch backup so that the processing can be completed quickly, and the method of backing up the second log area may be a divided backup so as to distribute the processing load. With such a configuration, the log information to be displayed as history information on the maintenance history screen in the maintenance mode is missing (for example, backup processing is not completed until the game machine is restarted). In addition, redundancy (availability) of the log information stored in the second log area, which is used as information for development and debugging by game machine manufacturers, can be improved. That is, it is possible to implement suitable backup according to the characteristics of the log information.

Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b executes an interrupt initialization process (step 099IWS205). In the interrupt initial setting process of step 099IWS205, it is sufficient if the interrupt priority controlled by the interrupt controller mounted on the second effect control board 012IW12b can be initialized. The priority of interrupts controlled by the interrupt controller may be set based on the interrupt priority data pre-stored in the program management area provided in the ROM 012IW 121b. For example, the order of priority of interrupts may be set such that the serial reception interrupt has a higher priority than the effect control timer interrupt. Then, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b sets the interrupt permission (step 099IWS206), and then enters the loop process.

FIG. 8-18 (B) shows a setting example of processing priority in the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b. The processing priority in the second effect control CPU012IW120b, together with the priority of the interrupt controlled by the interrupt controller mounted on the second effect control board 012IW12a, is determined in advance based on the specifications of the second effect control board 012IW12a. If possible. As an example, the processing when a CPU exception event occurs has the highest priority, followed by the serial reception interrupt, followed by processing according to the interrupt priority controlled by the interrupt controller. It suffices if the processing priority is set in advance so as to be the same.

The CPU exception event occurrence process is a process that is executed when an exception event due to an internal state abnormality or the like occurs in the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b. The exception event of the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b may occur when an undefined instruction that is not defined in the instruction set is decoded. The exception event of the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b may occur when an invalid operation such as zero division or overflow is executed. The exception event of the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b may occur when memory protection violation occurs in the virtual memory. The exception event of the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b may occur in the case of a TLB (Translation Lookaside Buffer) miss that causes an abnormality in translation from a virtual address to a physical address. Thus, the CPU exception event occurrence processing is executed when an exception event of the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b occurs. Therefore, when the event occurrence condition corresponding to the internal state of the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b is established, the CPU exception event occurrence processing is executed. The CPU exception event occurrence process can be executed when an event occurrence condition that can be established according to the internal state of the control device or the processing device, such as the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b, is established.

FIG. 8-20 is a flow chart showing an example of processing when a CPU exception event occurs. In the CPU exception event occurrence processing, first, exception preprocessing is executed (step 099IWS41). In the pre-exception processing of step 099 IWS41, control information for instruction code execution is saved in a predetermined area (such as a stack area) of the RAM 012IW 122b, for example. The control information for instruction code execution may include a stored value of a program counter (PC) and a value of a program status word (PSW). Following the exceptional preprocessing, exceptional backup processing is executed (step 099IWS42). In the exceptional backup process of step 099 IWS 42, log information including exceptional event information is stored. In this case, a control signal corresponding to the backup command for exception event occurrence is sent to the backup memory board 099IW14. The backup command for the occurrence of an exception event includes exception event information that can identify the exception event that occurred in the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b, date and time information obtained from the real-time clock 012IW 126 (for example, date and time information obtained from RTC 099IW 201 may be used). The exception event information may identifiably indicate the type of exception event. When the memory controller 099IW200 of the backup memory board 099IW14 receives the backup command for exception event occurrence, the memory controller 099IW200 may execute the write process of the log information including the exception event information.

After the exceptional backup process, other exceptional processes are executed (step 099IWS43). At step 099 IWS43, for example, the vector table may be accessed and an exception handling routine may be started by jumping to the acquired exception handler address. At this time, the stored value of the internal register (general-purpose register, etc.) of the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b may be saved. If the exception event could be resolved by the exception handling routine, or if the exception event could not be resolved and a reset occurred, backup processing similar to step 099 IWS42 is executed, and the exception event could be resolved or could be resolved. It may be possible to store the log information in the case where there is not. When the exception handling is finished, the exception post-treatment is executed (step 099IWS44), and the CPU exception event occurrence handling is finished. In the exception post-processing of step 099 IWS44, by restoring the stored value of the internal register (general-purpose register, etc.) of the second effect control CPU012IW120b, by restoring the control information for executing the instruction code, the processing before the exception event occurrence It should be possible to return to

The CPU exception event occurrence processing includes exception backup processing in step 099 IWS42. In the exception backup process of step 099IWS42, as backup data indicating log information, data including exception event information regarding the second effect control CPU012IW120b among the plurality of electronic components is stored in the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14. A write process is executed to write to the log area provided in the . The CPU exception event occurrence processing is executed when an exception event occurs in the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b, assuming that the event occurrence condition corresponding to the internal state of the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b is established. Thus, for the second effect control CPU012IW120b, when the occurrence conditions of the event corresponding to the internal state of the control device and the processing device are established, for the storage area such as the log area, a plurality of electronic components A write process can be performed to write and store information about the .

After being set to interrupt permission by step 099IWS206 of the production control main processing, a timeout occurs in a predetermined channel of the timer circuit 135 every predetermined time (such as 2 milliseconds), so that it is mounted on the second production control board 012IW12a. An interrupt request signal corresponding to the timer interrupt for effect control is output from the interrupt controller received to the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b. The second effect control CPU 012IW 120b that receives this interrupt request signal and accepts the interrupt request starts execution of the effect control timer interrupt process.

FIG. 8-21 is a flow chart showing an example of effect control timer interrupt processing. In this characteristic portion 099IW, the processing of steps 012IWS204 to S208 is the same as the processing of steps S73 to S77 shown in FIG. When the effect random number update process of step 012IWS208 is executed, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes effect mode change process for changing the effect mode (step 012IWS209).

In this characteristic part 099IW, it is possible to control three types of production modes, production mode A to production mode C, and depending on which production mode is controlled, for example, the background screen of the image display device 5 is different, The types of characters appearing in the advance notice effect and reach effect are different. In the effect mode change process of step 012IWS209, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b performs control to change from the current effect mode to a different effect mode when a predetermined effect mode change condition is satisfied. For example, based on the date and time information from the real-time clock 012IW126, the production mode may be changed based on a predetermined date and time. Further, for example, a lottery process based on random numbers may be executed, and the effect mode may be changed based on the decision to change the effect mode.

In step 012IWS209, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b, when changing the effect mode, for example, sets a flag corresponding to the effect mode after the change and resets the flag corresponding to the effect mode before the change. . For example, when the effect mode is changed to A, the effect mode A flag is set, and the effect mode B flag or effect mode C flag before the change is reset. Further, for example, when the effect mode is changed to B, the effect mode B flag may be set, and the effect mode A flag or effect mode C flag before the change may be reset. Also, for example, when the effect mode is changed to C, the effect mode C flag is set, and the effect mode A flag or effect mode B flag before the change is reset.

The method of changing the production mode may be changed in a predetermined order such as production mode A → production mode B → production mode C → production mode A → . Modes A to C may be changed at random.

Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b executes error notification processing for performing various error notifications (step 012IWS210). Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b controls the maintenance mode during setting confirmation, and executes maintenance mode processing for displaying the maintenance history screen and the setting change/confirmation history screen (step 012IWS211).

In the maintenance mode process of step 099 IWS 211, control is performed to enable display of the maintenance history screen and setting change/confirmation history screen. On the maintenance history screen, for example, when the setting confirmation display corresponding to the setting confirmation state or the maintenance mode menu screen is being displayed, detection of an operation that is an operation of the game hall staff on the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is performed. Based on the result, it becomes possible to display when it is determined that the maintenance history selection operation has been performed. When displaying the maintenance history screen, all log information is read from the log areas provided in the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14 (strictly speaking, the log information for the amusement arcade among the log information only the information is read, and the log information for the gaming machine maker is not read). The image display device 5 displays a maintenance history screen including the read log information as history information. The setting change/confirmation history screen can be displayed when it is determined that a setting change/confirmation history selection operation has been performed based on the detection result of the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B, which is an operation by the staff of the game arcade. Become. When displaying the setting change/confirmation history screen, all setting change and setting confirmation log information is read from the log areas provided in the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14. On the image display device 5, a setting change/confirmation history screen including log information of the read setting change and setting confirmation as history information is displayed. Note that the maintenance history screen and the setting change/confirmation history screen can be displayed based on the detection result of the operation performed by the person in charge of the pachinko game machine 1 manufacturer, unlike the person in charge of the game hall. good. The maintenance history screen and the setting change/confirmation history screen are screens that the player of the pachinko gaming machine 1 cannot visually recognize while playing the game. Just do it.

Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b executes a setting change time recording process for recording the date and time when the setting value is changed in the setting change process (step 012IWS212). Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b executes current time setting processing for setting the current time during the maintenance mode (step 012IWS213). Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b executes power failure date and time recording processing for recording the power failure date and time when the power failure occurs (step 012IWS214). Then, after executing the effect control backup process (step 099IWS215), the effect control timer interrupt process is terminated.

In the effect control backup process executed at step 099IWS215 of the effect control timer interrupt process, it is determined whether or not a preset backup condition is established. Then, when it is determined that the backup condition is met, a backup process is executed for storing and storing data to be backed up according to the backup condition that has been met. As for the backup condition, a plurality of different conditions may be set according to occurrence of events including various changes and settings in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . A backup control table indicating a plurality of backup conditions may be stored in advance, for example, in a predetermined area (such as a program management area) provided in the ROM 012IW 121b. The backup target data may include different data depending on the backup conditions. Alternatively, the backup target data may include data common to multiple backup conditions. Data to be backed up indicating log information including date and time information may be stored when any of the backup conditions are met. A batch backup and a divided backup may be prepared as backup methods for storing data to be backed up. In the case of batch backup, data to be backed up by one backup is stored in interrupt processing based on the occurrence of one timer interrupt for effect control. In the case of split backup, data to be backed up by one backup is stored in interrupt processing based on multiple occurrences of timer interrupts for effect control.

The backup process for storing and storing the data to be backed up according to the backup conditions is executed each time the effect control timer interrupt process is executed, when the backup conditions are established in the backup process during effect control in step 099 IWS215. It may be possible, or it may be possible to execute all at once when the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped. When the backup process is performed collectively at the time of power failure, when it is determined that the backup condition is satisfied in the backup process during effect control, for example, a predetermined area of the RAM 012IW 122b stores log information including date and time information for backup. Store data.

(Command analysis processing)
FIGS. 8-22 and 8-23 are flow charts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step 012IWS206). The effect control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b confirms the contents of the command stored in the command receive buffer.

In the command analysis process, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b first checks whether or not the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 012IWS301). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter and the read pointer. The case where the two match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the command reception buffer stores the reception command, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step 012IWS302). After reading, the value of the read pointer is incremented by 2 (step 012IWS303). The reason for incrementing by 2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read out at a time.

If the received effect control command is a set value command (step 012IWS304), the second effect control CPU012IW120b stores the set value indicated by the received set value command in the set value storage area formed in the RAM012IW122b. (Step 012 IWS 305). In addition, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b sets a setting value command reception flag indicating that the setting value command has been normally received at least once after the game machine is powered on (step 012IWS306). In this characteristic part 099IW, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area and the setting value command reception flag are reset in the initialization process (step 012IWS201) when the power supply to the gaming machine is started. and

In addition, in this characteristic part 099IW, a setting value command is transmitted when the game machine is powered on and setting change processing is performed. If it cannot be received at this point, the process of step 012 IWS 305 is not executed, and the set value is not stored in the set value storage area. However, in this characteristic part 099IW, even if the set value command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on, the set value command is transmitted for each fluctuation display, so the processing of step 012 IWS 305 is executed based on the set value command received thereafter. It can be executed and the setting value can be stored in the setting value storage area.

Also, even if the setting value command is received, the setting value included in the setting value command may be an abnormal value. It may be configured to determine whether or not the setting value included in the command is a normal value. For example, in this example, the setting value is configured to be set to any value from "1" to "3", but includes values such as "5" and "10" that should not be set. It may be configured to determine that the setting value included in the setting value command is abnormal when the setting value command contains the setting value. Also, for example, on the side of the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b, the setting value indicated by the received setting value command is stored, and then, when a new setting value command is received, the newly received setting value If the set value indicated by the command and the previously stored set value do not match, it may be determined that an inconsistency has occurred, and an abnormality may be determined. Even when it is determined that the setting value included in the setting value command is an abnormal value, the effect is restricted according to the processing method shown in the characteristic part 099IW assuming that the setting value command has not been received normally. It may be configured to

(Initial roll setting)
In this characteristic portion 099IW, when either the initialization designation command or the command at the time of recovery is received from the main board 11 in the command analysis process on the second effect control board 012IW12b side, the image display device 5 performs a predetermined initialization Perform control to display a winning number (specifically, a combination of decorative symbols, which is displayed on the image display device 5 until the first variable display is started) (hereinafter also referred to as an initial winning number effect). ).

If the received effect control command is an initialization command or a command at the time of restoration (step 012IWS307), the second effect control CPU012IW120b checks whether or not the setting value command reception flag is set (step 012IWS308). . If the setting value command reception flag is set (that is, when the setting change process is executed and the setting value command is normally received), the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b stores the setting value in the setting value storage area of the RAM 012IW 122b. Based on the stored setting values, an initial appearance decision table is used to determine even initial appearances (for example, "246" and "224"), which are combinations of even decoration symbols, and odd decoration symbols. Either a combination of odd initial numbers (for example, "135" or "113") or a special initial combination of decorative patterns including a special pattern (for example, a star pattern) is determined (step 012IWS309). Then, the process proceeds to step 012 IWS 314 .

FIG. 8-24 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an initial payout determination table. In step 012, IWS 309 performs lottery processing based on random numbers in accordance with the allocation of determination values according to the set values stored in the set value storage area using the initial outcome decision table shown in FIG. 8-24(A). determine the outcome. In the initial outcome determination table shown in FIG. 8-24(A), the ratio of odd initial outcomes determined increases in the order of set values "1"<"2"<"3". Therefore, if the odd initial outcome is displayed on the image display device 5 before the start of the game, it means that the setting has been changed and the set value is more advantageous than the case where the even initial outcome is displayed. It will be suggested that it is set to Also, as shown in FIG. 8-24(A), there are cases where a special initial roll is determined only when the set value is "3". Therefore, if the special initial result is displayed on the image display device 5 before the start of the game, it is determined that the setting has been changed and the set value is "3". With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player interested in the state of the pachinko game machine 1 before the start of the game, to give the player a motivation to start the game from an early time zone of the business hours of the game parlor, and to enhance the interest.

If the setting value command reception flag is not set (that is, if the setting value command cannot be received normally due to reasons such as missing commands or garbled data, although setting change processing has been executed), the second The effect control CPU 012IW 120b confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode A (step 012IWS310). Incidentally, whether or not it is the production mode A can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the production mode A flag is set. If the effect mode is A, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b assumes that the set value is "1" and determines the initial result using the initial result determination table shown in FIG. 8-24(A) ( step 012 IWS 311). Then, the process proceeds to step 012 IWS 314 .

By executing the processing of steps 012IWS310 to S311, in this characterizing section 099IW, when the setting value command cannot be received normally and the effect mode is A, the setting value which is the most disadvantageous setting The initial roll is determined to be "1". As shown in FIG. 8-24(A), with respect to the set value "1", odd initial rolls are determined to be the lowest, and special initial rolls are not determined. Such a configuration reduces the situation in which the player is rather discouraged by displaying odd-numbered initial numbers or special initial numbers in spite of the fact that disadvantageous set values are set, thereby making the player more interested in the game. It is possible to prevent the decline of

If it is not production mode A, the second production control CPU 012IW120b checks whether the current production mode is production mode C (step 012IWS312). It should be noted that whether or not it is the production mode C can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the production mode C flag is set. If it is effect mode C, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b determines the initial outcome using the initial effect determination table for effect mode C (step 012IWS313). Then, the process proceeds to step 012 IWS 314 .

FIG. 8-24(B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an initial outcome determination table for effect mode C. FIG. As shown in FIG. 8-24(B), in the initial outcome determination table for the effect mode C, an odd initial outcome is determined as compared with the case of the set value "3", which is most advantageous for the player. The percentage is low, and there are no cases where it is determined as a special initial roll.

By executing the processing of steps 012IWS312 to S313, in this characteristic part 099IW, if the set value command could not be received normally and the effect mode is C, a disadvantageous set value is set. To reduce a situation in which a player is rather discouraged by displaying an odd-numbered initial outcome or a special initial outcome in spite of the presence of the player, and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Then, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b controls the image display device 5 to display the initial numbers determined in steps 012IWS309, S311 and S313 (step 012IWS314).

It should be noted that, in this characteristic portion 099IW, it is described that control for display on the image display device 5, control for turning on the game effect lamp 9, control for outputting sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the like are described. , The second effect control CPU 012IW120b does not directly control the image display device 5, the game effect lamp 9, and the speakers 8L and 8R. to control the image display device 5, the game effect lamp 9, and the speakers 8L and 8R. On the side of the first effect control CPU 012IW120a, based on commands from the second effect control CPU 012IW120b, the image display device 5, the game effect lamp 9, and the speakers 8L and 8R are controlled to perform various effects and notifications. This is the same for other similar descriptions in this characterizing portion 099IW.

On the other hand, if it is not the production mode C (that is, if the current production mode is the production mode B), the second production control CPU 012IW 120b determines the initial appearance to be an even initial appearance, and displays the image. The device 5 is controlled to display even initial numbers (step 012IWS315).

By executing the process of step 012IWS315, this characterizing part 099IW uniformly displays an even-numbered initial outcome when the set value command cannot be received normally and in the case of the effect mode B. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the situation in which the player is rather discouraged by displaying odd initial results or special initial results in spite of the fact that disadvantageous set values are set, and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. I have to.

Even if the set value command is not normally received in the performance mode B, the odd initial appearing symbols may be determined at a low rate. In this case, for example, using a table in which the determination ratio of odd-numbered initial winning symbols is set lower than the set value "1" of the initial winning determination table shown in FIG. It may be configured to determine the eye design.

In addition, in this example, when the set value command could not be received normally and in the case of the production mode B, the case of uniformly displaying even initial numbers was shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. . For example, when the set value command cannot be received normally and in the case of the production mode B, when the set value command cannot be received normally, such as a combination of “???” symbols as the initial outcome. It may be configured to display a dedicated initial roll. Any combination of symbols that does not suggest a setting value at all in some form may be displayed as an initial outcome.

Further, the processing when the setting value command cannot be received normally (or when the setting value cannot be stored normally) is not limited to that shown in this example. For example, when it is judged as N in step 012 IWS 308, the setting value "1" may be stored in the setting value storage area as a default to determine the initial outcome. Also, for example, a dedicated setting value (for example, setting value "4") indicating that the setting value command could not be received normally is stored in the setting value storage area to determine the initial output. good too.

If the received production control command is a setting value abnormality error command (step 012IWS316), the second production control CPU 012IW120b executes setting value abnormality error notification (step 012IWS317). For example, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b displays a character display such as "A setting value abnormality error has occurred" on the image display device 5, and a sound or error sound indicating a setting value abnormality error from the speakers 8L and 8R. is output, and the game effect lamp 9 and LED are controlled to emit light in a predetermined error pattern. In this case, when the set value abnormality error notification is performed, the loudspeakers 8L and 8R output a sound with the maximum volume or an error sound, or the game effect lamp 9 or the LED emits light at maximum brightness (for example, a full-color LED In some cases, it is desirable to emit white light).

If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (effect control command specifying a variation pattern) (step 012IWS320), the second effect control CPU012IW120b, the received variation pattern command, the variation pattern formed in the RAM012IW122b Store in the command storage area (step 012 IWS321). Then, the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is set (step 012IWS322).

If the received effect control command is a display result designation command (whether a big hit or a small hit, a big hit type, a small hit type effect control command) (step 012 IWS323), the second effect The control CPU 012IW 120b stores the received display result designation command in the display result designation command storage area formed in the RAM 012IW 122b (step 012IWS324).

If the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (effect control command specifying that the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed) (step 012IWS325), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets the confirmation command reception flag. (step 012IWS326).

If the received production control command is a jackpot start designation command (production control command for designating the start of a jackpot game) (step 012IWS327), the second production control CPU 012IW120b sets a jackpot start designation command reception flag (step 012IWS328). ).

If the received production control command is a jackpot end designation command (production control command for designating the end of the jackpot game) (step 012IWS329), the second production control CPU 012IW120b sets a jackpot end designation command reception flag (step 012IWS330 ).

If the received effect control command is another command, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b stores the received effect control command or sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step 012IWS331). Then, the process proceeds to step 012 IWS 301 .

It should be noted that this characteristic part 099IW is configured so that if the setting change process is not executed when the power is turned on, the initial odd numbers are not displayed. good. Also in this case, the percentage determined for odd-numbered initial results may differ according to the set value (that is, the set value may be suggested).

Further, for example, instead of or in addition to an odd initial outcome or an even initial outcome, an initial outcome that denies the possibility of being a specific set value It is also possible to provide an initial result that confirms that the value is 2 or set value 3) or that that a specific set value is set, and display them according to the set value. For example, in the case of setting value 1, by not determining a specific initial result, when a specific initial result is displayed, the possibility of setting value 1 is denied, and setting value 2 or The set value 3 is determined. Also, for example, by setting a specific initial outcome to be determined only in the case of the set value of 3, the set value of 3 is determined when the specified initial outcome is displayed. . Further, when determining the initial outcome, any one of these initial outcomes may be determined by lottery. In this case, the ratio determined according to the set value may be different.

(Setting suggestion production)
In this characteristic part 099IW, the set value can be changed, and as a setting suggestion effect that suggests the set value, the pre-game suggestion effect executed before the game starts, the above-mentioned initial appearance effect, and during the game (for example, , during the variable display of decorative patterns), the setting suggestion based on the above-described determination tendency of the variation pattern, and the big hit suggesting performance performed during the big win (for example, during the big win game). It is In addition, in this characteristic part 099IW, the pre-game suggestive effect, the mid-game suggestive effect, and the big-hit suggestive effect can be executed in a plurality of types of effect modes with different degrees of reliability of suggestion. The reliability of the suggestion may be different for each. For example, the reliability of the suggestions may be increased in the order of pre-game suggestive performance > mid-jackpot suggestive performance > mid-game suggestive performance, or pre-game suggestive performance > mid-game suggestive performance > mid-jackpot suggestive performance, The reliability of the suggestion may be increased in the order of suggesting effect during game>suggesting effect during big win> suggesting effect before game, or in the order of suggesting effect during big win>suggesting effect during game>suggesting effect before game. Further, it may be configured such that the execution ratio of each setting suggestion effect can be set. For example, the administrator of the gaming machine does not execute some or all of the setting suggestive effects (for example, pre-game suggestive effects and initial appearance effects suggesting that the setting has been changed), or the execution rate The setting may be changed so as to lower (or raise) the . For example, after the power is turned on, a setting screen is displayed, and by operating operating means such as the push button 31B or operating means such as a switch provided inside the game machine (only the administrator can operate), settings related to the setting suggestion effect can be made. may be changed.

(variable display start waiting process)
FIG. 8-25 is a flow chart showing an example of variable display start waiting processing. In the variable display start waiting process, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b checks whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step 012IWS501).

When the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is set, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b performs control to terminate the customer waiting demonstration effect if it is being executed (step 012IWS502, step 012IWS503).

Then, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b resets the variation pattern command reception flag (step 012IWS504), updates the value of the effect process flag to "1" (step 012IWS505), and ends the variable display start waiting process.

When the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is not set, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b is not executing the customer waiting demonstration effect (N of step 012IWS 506), the result of time measurement by the time measuring means meets a predetermined condition. (step 012IWS507). In step 012 IWS 507, for example, when the timer (for example, set for 30 seconds) that was set when the previous variable display (display result "loss") ended timed out, it is determined that the predetermined condition is met. Also, when the timer is not set (that is, when the variable display has not been executed even once after the power is turned on and before the game is started), it is determined that the predetermined condition is met. That is, when a predetermined period of time has passed without the variable display being executed (and when the jackpot game state is not controlled), or before the start of the game, a predetermined condition is established, and a customer waiting demonstration effect is performed by the processing described later. will be executed.

If the time measurement result by the time measurement means matches the predetermined condition, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b determines whether or not the number of fluctuations after power-on is 0 (step 012IWS508). That is, at step 012 IWS 508, it is checked whether the game has not yet started. Whether or not the number of fluctuations after power-on is 0 is specifically determined by a fluctuation number counter for counting the number of times the variable display of decorative symbols is executed after power-on of the gaming machine, which will be described later. (see step 012 IWS 603) is 0 or not.

If the number of fluctuations after power-on is 0 times, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b checks whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 012IWS509). If the setting value command reception flag is set (that is, if the setting value command is normally received), the second effect control CPU012IW120b is based on the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM012IW122b. Then, using the pre-game suggestive effect determination table, whether or not to execute the pre-game suggestive effect and the effect mode in the case of execution are determined according to the set value (step 012IWS510). Then, the process proceeds to step 012 IWS515.

In this characteristic portion 099IW, when the customer waiting demonstration effect including the pre-game suggestive effect of the first effect mode is executed, the decoration lamp is changed to the first special color (blue) different from the normal color (for example, white). When the customer waiting demonstration effect including the pre-game suggestive effect of the second effect mode is executed, the decoration lamp is controlled to the second special color (red) to perform the pre-game suggestive effect of the third effect mode. When the customer waiting demonstration effect of the mode including is executed, the decoration lamp is controlled to the third special color (rainbow color).

FIG. 8-26 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a pre-game suggestion effect determination table. At step 012 IWS 510, a lottery process based on random numbers is performed using the pre-game suggestive effect determination table shown in FIG. Whether or not to execute a pre-game suggestive effect and the mode of effect are determined. In the pre-game suggestive effect determination table shown in FIG. 8-26(A), determination values are assigned in the order of setting values "1"<"2"<"3" so that the ratio of execution of the pre-game suggestive effect increases. It is In addition, determination values are assigned so that the ratio of determination to the second effect mode increases in the order of setting values "1"<"2"<"3". With such a configuration, it is suggested that the set value is set to be advantageous by executing the pre-game suggesting effect and executing it in the second effect mode rather than in the first effect mode. Become. In addition, by executing the pre-game suggestion effect, it is suggested that the setting has been changed when the power is turned on. Also, as shown in FIG. 8-26(A), the third effect mode may be determined only when the set value is "3". Therefore, by executing the pre-game suggestive effect in the third effect mode, it is determined that the setting has been changed and the set value is "3".

If the setting value command reception flag is not set (that is, if the setting value command cannot be received normally due to reasons such as missing commands or garbled data, although setting change processing has been executed), the second The effect control CPU 012IW 120b confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode A (step 012IWS511). Incidentally, whether or not it is the production mode A can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the production mode A flag is set. If the effect mode is A, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b uses the pre-game suggestive effect determination table shown in FIG. It determines the presence or absence of and effect mode (step 012IWS512). Then, the process proceeds to step 012 IWS515.

By executing the processing of steps 012IWS511 to S512, in this characterizing section 099IW, when the setting value command cannot be received normally and in the production mode A, the setting value which is the most disadvantageous setting Whether or not the pre-game suggestive effect is to be executed and the effect mode are determined as "1". As shown in FIG. 8-26(A), with respect to the setting value "1", the rate of determination of the second rendering mode is the lowest, and there is no case of determination of the third rendering mode. Such a configuration reduces the situation in which the pre-game suggestion performance is executed in the second performance mode or the third performance mode despite the disadvantageous set value being set, and the player is rather discouraged. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the decline in interest in the game.

If it is not the production mode A, the second production control CPU 012IW120b checks whether the current production mode is the production mode C (step 012IWS513). It should be noted that whether or not it is the production mode C can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the production mode C flag is set. If it is effect mode C, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b uses the pre-game suggestive effect determination table for effect mode C to determine whether or not to execute the pre-game suggestive effect and the effect mode (step 012IWS514). Then, the process proceeds to step 012 IWS515.

FIG. 8-26(B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a pre-game suggestion effect determination table for effect mode C. FIG. As shown in FIG. 8-26(B), in the pre-game suggestive effect determination table for the effect mode C, it is determined to execute the pre-game suggestive effect compared to the case of the set value "2" or "3". The percentage of the performance mode itself is low, the percentage of determination of the first rendering mode and the second rendering mode is low, and the third rendering mode is not determined.

By executing the processing of steps 012IWS513 to S514, in this characteristic part 099IW, if the set value command could not be received normally and the effect mode is C, a disadvantageous set value is set. To reduce a situation in which a pre-game suggesting performance is executed by a second performance mode or a third performance mode in spite of the fact that a player is present and disappoint a player instead, and to prevent a decrease in interest in a game.

Then, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b performs control to execute the customer waiting demonstration effect including the pre-game suggestive effect determined in steps 012IWS510, S512 and S514 (step 012IWS515). Then, the process proceeds to step 012 IWS517.

On the other hand, if it is not the production mode C (that is, if the current production mode is the production mode B), the second production control CPU 012IW 120b proceeds directly to step 012IWS516. That is, in the case of the effect mode B, the pre-game suggestive effect is restricted so as not to be executed.

By executing the process of step 012IWS513, the characteristic part 099IW does not execute the pre-game suggestion effect when the set value command cannot be normally received and the effect mode is B, To reduce a situation in which a pre-game suggesting performance is executed in spite of setting a disadvantageous set value and instead disappoint a player, and to prevent a decrease in interest in a game.

Even when the set value command is not normally received in the effect mode B, the pre-game suggestive effect may be executed at a low rate. In this case, for example, using a table in which the execution ratio of the pre-game suggestive effect is set lower than the setting value "1" of the pre-game suggestive effect determination table shown in FIG. It may be configured so as to determine the presence or absence and type of the suggestive effect.

8-26(A), only a specific rendering mode (for example, the second rendering mode) out of the plurality of rendering modes may have different execution ratios according to the set values. can be

Further, for example, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) among the plurality of effect modes is executed, the possibility of being a specific set value may be denied. For example, in the case of the set value 1, by not determining the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode), when the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed, the setting The possibility of being value 1 is denied, and setting value 2 or setting value 3 is determined. Further, when a specific effect mode (for example, a second effect mode) is executed, a specific set value may be determined. For example, only when the set value is 3, the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is determined, so that when the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed, The set value 3 is determined.

In this characteristic portion 099IW, the pre-game suggestive effects can be executed at different ratios according to the set values. 3 production modes) are different, the execution ratios of the first production mode, the second production mode and the third production mode are different according to the set value, only the specific production mode according to the set value This is a concept that includes different execution ratios.

It should be noted that this characteristic portion 099IW is configured not to execute the pre-game suggestion effect if the setting has not been changed when the power is turned on and the set value command has not yet been received. Not limited to this, the pre-game suggesting effect may be executed even when the settings are not changed. In this case, whether or not to execute the pre-game suggestion effect and the effect mode in the case of execution may be determined at different rates depending on when the setting change is performed and when it is not performed.

For example, FIG. 8-26(C) is a pre-game suggestive effect determination table that is used when a recovery command is received. Comparing the pre-game suggestive effect determination table shown in FIG. 8-26(A) with the pre-game suggestive effect determination table shown in FIG. When it is not performed, the ratio of execution of the pre-game suggestive effect is lower than when the setting is changed, and the difference in the execution ratio between the set values is also small. By doing so, the reliability of the suggestion by the pre-game suggestion effect can be made different between when the setting change is performed and when it is not performed.

If the number of fluctuations after the power is turned on is not 0, the CPU 120 performs control to execute the customer waiting demonstration effect including the execution history information of the setting suggestive effect (excluding the pre-game suggestive effect) (step 012IWS516).

When the process of step 012 IWS 516 is executed, for example, in the image display device 5, an execution history indicating the number of executions of setting suggestive effects (in-game suggestive effects and jackpot-indicative effects) and execution details (performance mode at the time of execution) is displayed. A customer waiting demonstration effect is executed in which information is displayed. When the process of step 012 IWS516 is executed, the customer waiting demonstration effect is executed, and if a predetermined operation (for example, the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B) is performed during the execution of the customer waiting demo effect, In the image display device 5, the execution history information of the setting suggestion effect may be displayed. In addition, on the side of the first effect control board 012IW12a and the second effect control board 012IW12b, the number of executions and the execution contents of setting suggestion effects (initial appearance effect, pre-game suggestion effect, during-game suggestion effect, jackpot during-suggestion effect, etc.) It is also possible to store information indicating (performance mode at the time of execution), and execute an effect in which a set value is estimated from this information and notified. It should be noted that this effect notifies the setting expectation level (or estimated setting value) calculated based on a predetermined standard from the execution status of the setting suggestion effect, and does not notify the actual setting value. .

In this characteristic portion 099IW, the pre-game suggestive effect is executed only before the game is started by the processing of steps 012IWS508 to 012IWS515. In addition, the execution history information of the setting suggesting effect during the customer waiting demonstration effect is shown by the processing of step 012 IWS516, but the information related to the pre-game suggesting effect is excluded. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player interested in the state of the pachinko game machine 1 before the start of the game, to give the player a motivation to start playing the game from an early time zone of the business hours of the game parlor, and to enhance the interest. . In addition, not limited to the example of this characteristic part 099IW, for example, using a real-time clock 012IW126 or the like, the pre-game suggestion effect is executed only during a predetermined time period (for example, from 9:00 am to 11:00 am). may In addition, the execution history information of the setting suggesting effect may not include information about the in-game suggesting effect during the special period.

In addition to the configuration of this characteristic portion 099IW, the number of executions and execution details of the setting suggestion effect are accumulated as execution history information, and when the game ends, the image display device 5 displays a two-dimensional image including the execution history information as will be described later. It may be configured to display a code or the like. In addition, when a player takes a picture of a two-dimensional code displayed on a game machine using a mobile terminal such as a mobile phone with a camera function and transmits the picture to a web server on the Internet, the web server can read the code based on the received information. A game history of a player may be managed, and a process of giving a predetermined privilege according to the game history may be performed. Alternatively, the player may access the web server using the mobile terminal (or analyze the two-dimensional code) to acquire the execution history information and display it on the display device of the mobile terminal. Alternatively, a setting suggestion image suggesting a setting value may be displayed on a display device of the mobile terminal by the player using the mobile terminal to read the two-dimensional code including the execution history information. For example, a setting value that is estimated based on a predetermined standard is calculated from the execution history information, and a setting suggestion image that suggests the calculated setting value (which is only an estimate and is different from the actual setting value) is displayed. may

Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b confirms whether or not it has detected that the game end operation has been performed by the player (step 012IWS517). For example, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b, based on the detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B, confirms whether or not it has detected that the game end option has been selected and the determination operation has been performed. . If it is detected that the game end operation is performed, the second effect control CPU012IW120b extracts the log information from the log area provided in the backup data memory 099IW210A ~ 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14, the extracted log A two-dimensional code including information (for example, log information of the probability variation non-establishment date and time described later) is generated (step 012IWS518). Then, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b performs control to display the generated two-dimensional code on the image display device 5 (step 012IWS519), and ends the variable display start waiting process.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 099IW, it is described that the operation is performed, such as detection, but the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b does not directly input the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B. , More specifically, the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B is first inputted on the first effect control CPU 012IW 120a side, and the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b passes through the first effect control CPU 012IW 120a. A command indicating that the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B has been operated is input. This is the same for other similar descriptions in this characterizing portion 099IW.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 8-27 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b first reads the variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step 012IWS601). Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b is the data stored in the variable pattern command read in step 012IWS 601 and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command). (Stop symbol) is determined (step 012 IWS 602). That is, by executing the process of step 012IWS602 by the second effect control CPU012IW120b, according to the variable display pattern (variation pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determining means, the display result of the variable display of the identification information (decorative pattern A display result determining means for determining the stop symbol of (1) is realized. It should be noted that the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b stores the data indicating the stop design of the determined decoration design in the decoration design display result storage area. In step 012IWS 602, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b determines whether or not it is a big hit based on the received variation pattern command, and determines the decorative pattern stop pattern based only on the variation pattern command. good too.

In step 012 IWS 602, for example, when the received display result designation command indicates a probability variable jackpot, the second effect control CPU 012 IW 120b determines a combination of decoration patterns in which three patterns are the same odd number patterns as stop patterns. . In addition, for example, when the received display result designation command indicates a normal jackpot (non-probability variable jackpot), the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b is a combination of decoration patterns in which three patterns are the same even number patterns as the stop pattern. to decide.

In addition, when the received display result designation command indicates a small hit, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b selects a combination of decorative patterns of small winning patterns according to the small hit type specified by the display result designation command. decide. In this example, in the case of the small win type A, the combination of "135" is determined as the small winning pattern, and in the case of the small winning type B, the combination of "357" is determined as the small winning pattern. In the case of type C, a combination of "579" is determined as a small winning symbol.

Also, when the received display result designation command indicates a failure, a combination of decorative patterns other than the above is determined. However, when the ready-to-win effect is involved, a combination of decorative patterns in which the left and right two patterns are aligned is determined.

In addition, when the pseudo-run is specified by the variation pattern command, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b, in step 012IWS602, sets the chance symbol (for example, "223" or "445") as the temporary stop symbol of the pseudo-run. Similarly, a combination of a jackpot pattern that does not become a reach and a pattern that is shifted by one pattern) is also determined.

The second effect control CPU 012IW 120b, for example, extracts a random number for determining a stop pattern, and uses a stop pattern determination table in which data indicating a combination of decorative patterns and numerical values are associated with each other to stop the decorative pattern. Decide on the pattern. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value matching the extracted random number.

Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b adds 1 to the value of the variation number counter for counting the number of times the variation display of decorative symbols is executed after the game machine is powered on (step 012IWS603). In this feature part 099IW, the value of the fluctuation number counter is reset in the initialization process (step 012IWS201) when the power supply to the gaming machine is started, and the value of the fluctuation number counter is reset when the gaming machine is powered on. It shall start from the state where the value is 0.

Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b executes the during-game suggestive effect determination process for determining the presence or absence of the during-game suggestive effect and the effect mode (step 012IWS604).

Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b selects a process table corresponding to the during-game suggestive effect if the variation pattern and execution of the suggestive effect during the game have been determined (step 012IWS605). Then, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 012IWS606).

The process table is a table in which process data referred to when the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b controls the effect devices (parts for effect) such as the image display device 5 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer setting values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data and sound number data are collected. The display control execution data includes data indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative pattern. Specifically, data related to changing the display screen of the image display device 5 is described. In addition, the process timer set value is set with a variable time in the mode of variation. The second effect control CPU 012IW 120b refers to the process table and performs control to display the decoration pattern in the variable mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value. Moreover, the process table is stored in ROM012IW121b in 2nd production|presentation control board 012IW12b. Also, the process table is prepared according to each variation pattern.

In addition, in the process table used when performing the effect control for the variation pattern involving the ready-to-win effect, the left symbol is stopped when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variation, and the right symbol is stopped when a predetermined time has passed. Process data indicating to display is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, an image for displaying the symbols is synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbols, the temporary stop symbols in the simulated run and the sliding effect. may

Further, when the execution of the suggestive effect during the game is determined in the step 012IWS604 for determining the suggestive effect during the game, a process table including the suggestive effect during the game is selected in the step 012IWS605, and the selected process table is followed by the step 012IWS607. And by executing the effect processing during variable display (step S172), the suggestive effect during the game is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols.

In addition, the second production control CPU012IW120b, according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1) production device (image display device 5 as production parts, production parts (Step 012IWS607).

In addition, in this characteristic portion 099IW, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b controls so that the variable display of the decoration pattern is performed by the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern command one-to-one, but the second effect control CPU 012IW120b , the variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of variation patterns corresponding to the variation pattern command.

Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b sets the variable time timer to a value corresponding to the variable time specified by the variable pattern command (step 012IWS608). Then, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b updates the value of the effect process flag to "2" (step 012IWS609), and terminates the variable display start setting process.

(Suggestion effect determination process during game)
FIG. 8-28 is a flow chart showing an example of the in-game suggestion effect determination process (step 012IWS604). The in-game suggestion effect determination process is executed in the variable display start setting process (step S171). In the during-game suggestive effect determination process, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b selects the first during-game suggestive effect determination table (step 012IWS702) when it is during the special period (Y in step 012IWS701), and during the special period If not (N in step 012IWS701), select the second in-game suggestion effect determination table (step 012IWS703). For example, when a setting change end command or a set value command is received, the special period flag is set, and when the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example), the special period flag is reset. For example, by confirming the state of the special period flag, it can be confirmed in step 012 IWS 701 whether or not it is during the special period.

Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b confirms whether or not the setting value command reception flag is set (step 012IWS704). If the setting value command reception flag is set (that is, if the setting value command is normally received), the second effect control CPU012IW120b is based on the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM012IW122b. Then, using the selected in-game suggestive effect determination table, whether or not to execute the in-game suggestive effect and the effect mode in the case of execution are determined (step 012 IWS 705).

FIG. 8-29(A) is an explanatory diagram showing a first during-game suggestive effect determination table used during the special period, and FIG. 8-29(B) is a second during-game suggestive effect used during the non-special period. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a decision table;

8-29 (A) and (B) show the first and second in-game suggestive effect determination tables, in which the in-game suggestive effect is executed in the order of set values "1"<"2"<"3". Judgment values are assigned so that the percentage of With such a configuration, it is suggested that an advantageous set value is set by executing the in-game suggestion effect.

Also, regarding the second effect mode (mini-characters A and B appear), the set value "1"<"2"<"3" has a high rate of execution in the order, and the first effect mode (mini-character A appears). Judgment values are assigned so that the difference in the execution ratio between the set values is greater than . That is, the second effect mode has a high degree of reliability that the set value is set to be more advantageous than the first effect mode.

In addition, in the first and second in-game suggestive effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 8-29 (A) and (B), the in-game suggestive effect in the second effect mode with high reliability is executed only during the special period. is configured as With such a configuration, it is possible to motivate players to play games during the special period, and to enhance interest.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 8-29(A) and (B), the third rendering mode (character C appearance) may be determined only when the set value is "3". Therefore, the setting value "3" is determined by executing the in-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode.

If the setting value command reception flag is not set (that is, if the setting value command cannot be received normally due to reasons such as missing commands or garbled data, although setting change processing has been executed), the second The effect control CPU 012IW 120b confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode A (step 012IWS706). Incidentally, whether or not it is the production mode A can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the production mode A flag is set. If the effect mode is A, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b assumes that the setting value is "1", and uses the selected during-game suggestive effect determination table to determine whether or not to execute the during-game suggestive effect and the effect mode. (step 012 IWS 707).

By executing the processing of steps 012IWS706 to S707, in this characterizing section 099IW, when the setting value command cannot be received normally and in the production mode A, the setting value which is the most disadvantageous setting Whether or not to execute the in-game suggestion effect and the effect mode are determined as "1". As shown in FIGS. 8-29 (A) and (B), with respect to the setting value "1", the ratio of determining to execute the suggestive effect during the game itself is low, and the ratio of determining the second effect mode is low. is the lowest, and there is no case where the third rendering mode is determined. Such a configuration reduces the situation in which the suggestive performance during the game is executed by the second performance mode or the third performance mode in spite of the disadvantageous set value being set, and the player is rather discouraged. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the decline in interest in the game.

If it is not the production mode A, the second production control CPU 012IW 120b checks whether the current production mode is the production mode C (step 012IWS708). It should be noted that whether or not it is the production mode C can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the production mode C flag is set. If it is effect mode C, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b uses the during-game suggestive effect determination table for effect mode C to determine whether or not to execute the during-game suggestive effect and the effect mode (step 012IWS709).

FIG. 8-29(C) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the in-game suggestive effect determination table for the effect mode C. FIG. As shown in FIG. 8-29(C), in the during-game suggestive effect determination table for the effect mode C, the rate of determination to execute the during-game suggestive effect is lower than in the case of the set value "3". , is also determined to be the third effect mode.

By executing the processing of steps 012IWS708 to S709, in this characteristic part 099IW, if the set value command could not be normally received and the effect mode is C, a disadvantageous set value is set. To reduce a situation in which a suggestive performance during a game is executed by a second performance mode or a third performance mode in spite of the fact that the player is in the game and disappoint the player instead, and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

On the other hand, if it is not the effect mode C (that is, if the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b ends the process as it is. That is, in the case of the effect mode B, it is restricted so as not to execute the during-game suggestive effect.

By executing the process of step 012IWS708, the characterizing section 099IW does not execute the in-game suggestion effect when the set value command cannot be received normally and the effect mode is B, To prevent a decline in interest in a game by reducing a situation in which a suggestive performance during a game is executed in spite of setting a disadvantageous set value and disappointing the player instead.

Incidentally, even when the set value command is not normally received in the effect mode B, the in-game suggestive effect may be executed at a low rate. In this case, for example, a table is used in which the execution ratio of the during-game suggestive effect is set lower than the set value "1" of the during-game suggestive effect determination table shown in FIGS. 8-29 (A) and (B). may be configured to determine the presence or absence and type of the in-game suggestive effect.

8-29 (A) and (B), only a specific rendering mode (for example, the second rendering mode) out of the plurality of rendering modes is executed according to the setting value. Different ratios may be used.

Further, for example, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) among the plurality of effect modes is executed, the possibility of being a specific set value may be denied. For example, in the case of the set value 1, by not determining the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode), when the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed, the setting The possibility of being value 1 is denied, and setting value 2 or setting value 3 is determined. Further, when a specific effect mode (for example, a second effect mode) is executed, a specific set value may be determined. For example, only when the set value is 3, the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is determined, so that when the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed, The set value 3 is determined.

In this characteristic portion 099IW, it is possible to execute suggestive effects during the game at different ratios according to the set values. 3 production modes) are different, the execution ratios of the first production mode, the second production mode and the third production mode are different according to the set value, only the specific production mode according to the set value This is a concept that includes different execution ratios.

It should be noted that this characteristic portion 099IW is configured to be able to execute a suggestive effect during a game in a common mode (for example, the first effect mode) in the special period and the non-special period, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. , it may be possible to execute a suggestive effect during the game in a different manner. For example, the size, color, etc. of the mini-character A may differ between the special period and the non-special period.

In addition, in this characteristic part 099IW, whether or not the suggestive effect during the game is executed and the effect mode when it is executed are different depending on whether it is the special period or the non-special period and the set value. However, in addition to such a configuration, for example, the variation time specified by the variation pattern, the presence or absence of the reach effect, the type of reach effect, the presence or absence of the pseudo-continuous effect, the type of the pseudo-continuous effect, and the display result are the big hits. Depending on whether or not, the presence or absence of execution of the suggestive effect during the game, and the effect mode in the case of execution may differ.

For example, it may be possible to execute the during-game suggestion effect only when the variation pattern includes at least the ready-to-win effect (that is, the variation time is longer than the non-ready-to-win variation pattern). Further, for example, between a variation pattern including super reach B and a variation pattern including super reach A having a higher degree of expectation than super reach B, the latter seems to have a higher rate of execution of suggestive effects during the game. Alternatively, the reliability may be increased when the suggestive effect during the game is executed, or the ratio of the suggestive effect during the game being executed may be increased and the reliability when the effect is executed may be increased. You can make it higher.

Further, for example, between a variation pattern that includes a pseudo-continuous effect and a variation pattern that does not include a pseudo-continuous effect (or has a smaller number of pseudo-continuous effects than the former), the former has a higher rate of execution of the suggestive effect during the game. It may be made higher, the reliability may be increased when the suggestive performance during the game is executed, the ratio of the suggestive performance during the game being executed may be increased, and the reliability when the suggestive performance during the game is executed may be increased. The reliability may be increased.

Further, for example, between a variation pattern in which the display result is a big win and a variation pattern in which the display result is not a big win, the former may have a higher ratio of execution of the suggestive effect during the game. It is possible to increase the reliability when the middle suggestive performance is executed, or to increase the ratio of executing the mid-game suggestive performance and to increase the reliability when it is executed. .

(Production decision processing during jackpot)
FIG. 8-30 is a flow chart showing an example of the effect determination process during the big hit. During the big hit, the effect determination process is executed in the big hit pre-opening process (step S114). In the big hit production determination process, the second production control CPU 012IW 120b checks whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 012IWS901). If the setting value command reception flag is set (that is, if the setting value command is normally received), the second effect control CPU012IW120b is based on the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM012IW122b. Then, whether or not to execute a suggesting effect during a big hit, and the effect mode in the case of executing the effect are determined (step 012 IWS 902). Then, the process moves to step 012 IWS 907 .

In step S012IWS902, if it is a period (hereinafter also referred to as a specific period) from the start of the game until the variable display is executed a specific number of times (100 times in this example), the The 1st big hit suggestive effect determination table is selected, and if it is not during the specific period, the 2nd big win suggestive effect determination table shown in FIG. 8-31(B) is selected. Then, whether or not to execute the middle-big-hit suggesting performance and the manner of performance in the case of execution are determined based on the selected table for determining the middle-big-hit suggesting performance and the set value. It should be noted that the "game start time point" here refers to the time point at which the first variation display starts after the power is turned on, but is not limited to this. It may be at the time when the display is started, or at the time when the first variable display is started after the end of the customer waiting demonstration effect. Further, in this characteristic portion 099IW, regardless of whether or not the setting has been changed when the power is turned on, the period from the start of the game to the execution of the variable display a specific number of times (100 times in this example) is defined as the specific period. However, when the setting is changed when the power is turned on, the period from the start of the game to the execution of the variable display a specific number of times (100 times in this example) may be the specific period. Further, for example, the specific period is divided into a plurality of periods, the first specific period (the period from the start of the game until the fluctuation display is executed 50 times), the second specific period (the 51st fluctuation after the start of the game) A period from the display to the execution of the 100th variable display) may use a mid-jackpot suggesting effect determination table in which the presence or absence of the mid-jackpot suggesting effect and the determination ratio of the effect mode are different.

8-31 (A) and (B) show the first and second jackpot mid-suggestion effect determination tables, both of which execute the jackpot mid-suggestion effect in the order of set values "1" < "2" < "3" Judgment values are assigned so that the percentage of With such a configuration, it is suggested that an advantageous set value is set by executing the effect suggesting during the big hit.

In addition, regarding the second rendering mode and the third rendering mode, the ratio of execution in the order of the set values “1”<“2”<“3” is high, and the execution ratio between the set values in the specific period and the non-specific period Judgment values are assigned so that the difference between In other words, during the specific period, it is configured such that the suggesting production during the big hit with higher reliability than the non-specific period is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game during the specific period, and to increase the interest. It should be noted that not only the configuration of this characteristic portion 099IW, but also the effect suggesting during the jackpot (or a specific effect mode thereof) may be executed only during a specific period and may not be executed during a non-specific period.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-31 (A) and (B), there are cases where the fourth rendering mode is determined only when the set value is "3". Therefore, the setting value "3" is determined by executing the effect indicating that the jackpot is in progress according to the fourth effect mode.

In this characteristic portion 099IW, when the effect suggesting during the big win is executed in the third effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. After that, as shown in FIG. 8-43 (B1), the dialogue C image (“high setting!?”) 012IW102 is displayed.

In addition, when the big hit suggesting effect is executed in the fourth effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. As shown in 8-44 (C1), the dialogue D image (“high setting confirmed”) 012IW105 is displayed.

If the setting value command reception flag is not set (that is, if the setting value command cannot be received normally due to reasons such as missing commands or garbled data, although setting change processing has been executed), the second The effect control CPU 012IW 120b confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode A (step 012IWS903). Incidentally, whether or not it is the production mode A can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the production mode A flag is set. If it is the production mode A, the second production control CPU 012IW 120b assumes that the setting value is "1", and uses the selected big-hit medium-suggestion production determination table to determine whether or not to execute the big-hit medium-suggestion production and the production mode. (step 012 IWS 904). Then, the process moves to step 012 IWS 907 .

By executing the processing of steps 012IWS903 to S904, in this characterizing part 099IW, when the set value command cannot be received normally and the effect mode is A, the set value which is the most disadvantageous setting Whether or not to execute a suggesting effect during a big hit and the effect mode are determined as "1". As shown in FIGS. 8-31 (A) and (B), for the setting value "1", the rate of determination of the second rendering mode and the third rendering mode is the lowest, and the fourth rendering mode is determined. never be. By constructing in this manner, the player is rather discouraged by executing the performance suggesting that the jackpot is in progress by the second performance mode, the third performance mode, and the third performance mode in spite of the disadvantageous set value being set. It is possible to reduce the situation where the game is lost and prevent the decline in interest in the game.

If it is not production mode A, the second production control CPU 012IW 120b checks whether the current production mode is production mode C (step 012IWS905). It should be noted that whether or not it is the production mode C can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the production mode C flag is set. If the effect mode is C, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b uses the during-big-hit suggestive effect determination table for effect mode C to determine whether or not to execute the during-big-hit suggestive effect and the effect mode (step 012IWS906). Then, the process moves to step 012 IWS 907 .

FIG. 8-31(C) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a jackpot mid-jackpot effect determination table for effect mode C. FIG. As shown in FIG. 8-31 (C), in the big hit suggesting effect determination table for the effect mode C, the ratio of deciding to execute the jackpot suggesting effect itself is low, and the set value is "2" or "3". As compared with , the ratio of determination to the second rendering mode or the third rendering mode is low, and there is no case of determination to be the fourth rendering mode.

By executing the processing of steps 012IWS905 to S906, in this characteristic part 099IW, if the set value command could not be received normally and the effect mode is C, a disadvantageous set value is set. In spite of the presence of the player, the second performance mode, the third performance mode, and the third performance mode are used to reduce the situation in which the player is rather discouraged by the execution of the suggesting performance during the big win by the second performance mode, the third performance mode, and the third performance mode, and to prevent the decrease in the interest in the game. I have to.

On the other hand, if it is not the production mode C (that is, if the current production mode is the production mode B), the second production control CPU 012IW 120b proceeds directly to step 012IWS907. That is, in the case of the performance mode B, it is restricted so as not to execute the suggestive performance during the big hit.

By executing the process of step 012 IWS 905, in this characteristic part 099IW, when the setting value command cannot be received normally and in the case of the production mode B, by not executing the suggestion production during the big hit, To prevent a player from losing interest in a game by reducing a situation in which a player is rather discouraged by execution of a jackpot suggesting performance in spite of the setting of a disadvantageous set value.

In addition, even when the set value command is not normally received in the performance mode B, it may be possible to execute the performance suggesting during the big win at a low rate. In this case, for example, a table is used in which the execution ratio of the suggestion effect during the jackpot is set lower than the setting value "1" of the determination table indicating the effect during the jackpot shown in FIGS. 8-31 (A) and (B). It may be configured so as to determine the presence or absence and type of the jackpot middle suggestive effect.

8-31 (A) and (B), only a specific rendering mode (for example, the third rendering mode) out of the plurality of rendering modes is executed according to the set value. Different ratios may be used.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 8-31 (A), when a big win is achieved in a specific period, the effect suggesting that the jackpot is in progress is always executed, but it may not be executed at a low rate. may In this case, the non-execution rate may be varied according to the set value. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 8-31 (B), regardless of the setting value, the ratio of non-execution of the suggestion effect during the big hit is the same, but the ratio of non-execution is different according to the setting value. You may allow

In addition, in this characteristic part 099IW, when a big win is achieved in a specific period, a suggestion performance during a big hit is executed as a setting suggestion performance. A setting suggesting effect (for example, a dialog image suggesting a set value is displayed when a predetermined condition is satisfied) may be executed based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied during a specific period. In this case, the predetermined condition may be established, for example, when the number of executions of the ready-to-win effect or pseudo-continuous effect reaches a predetermined number of times, or when a specific super ready-to-win effect or advance notice effect is executed.

In this characteristic part 099IW, it is possible to execute the suggesting effect during the big hit at a different ratio according to the set value, but this is the suggesting effect during the big hit (first effect mode, second effect mode, third effect mode) according to the set value. (including the effect mode and the fourth effect mode) are different, the execution rates of the first effect mode, the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the fourth effect mode are different according to the set value, the set value It is a concept including that only a specific rendering mode (for example, the third rendering mode) has a different execution ratio depending on the situation.

Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b determines whether or not to execute the character product effect (step 012IWS907).

Here, it is assumed that the movable member 012IW101 is provided above the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 8-43(A1), for example. In such a configuration, when the character effect is executed, the movable member 012IW101 is controlled to move to the front of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 8-43 (B2).

As shown in FIGS. 8-43 (A1) and (B2), when the character effect is executed, the movable member 012IW101 moves to the front of the image display device 5, so that the image display device 5 performs a jackpot-indicating effect. It becomes difficult to visually recognize the position where the dialogue image is displayed. In this characteristic portion 099IW, since the effect indicating during the big win and the performance of the character object are executed at different timings during the fanfare period in the big win game, the movable member 012IW101 actually moved to the front of the image display device 5 is the big win. The dialogue image displayed by the intermediate suggestive effect is not covered. However, when the movable member 012IW101 is operated by the performance of the character during the fanfare period, the player's attention is directed to the movable member 012IW101, and there is a risk of overlooking the dialogue image displayed by the big-hit suggestive performance. Therefore, in step 012IWS907, by using the character effect determination table shown in FIG. 8-31(D), when the suggesting effect during the big hit is executed, the character effect is not executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest due to difficulty in recognizing the implying effect during the big win. Also, with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the impossibility of recognizing the mid-big-win suggestive performance even if the mid-big-win suggestive performance and the accessory performance are executed at the same timing.

In addition, when the execution of the suggestive effect during the big hit is determined, the execution timing of either the suggestive effect during the big hit or the performance of the character is changed (for example, the role effect is performed during the fanfare period, and the suggestive effect during the big hit is performed. During the ending period), it may be possible to prevent the suggestive effect during the big win from becoming difficult to recognize. In addition, when execution of the suggesting performance during the big win is determined, the operation mode of the movable member 012IW101 is changed (for example, it is controlled so as not to stop at the position overlapping the dialogue image by the suggesting performance during the big win), or the big win is performed. It is also possible to prevent the difficulty in recognizing the mid-big-hit suggestive effect by changing the display position of the dialogue image by the medium suggestive effect. Further, when execution of the suggesting effect during the big hit has been determined, the execution of the character effect may be restricted by lowering the execution ratio of the character effect. Also, the execution of the performance of the character product may be restricted only during a specific period. Also, not only the example shown in FIG. 8-31(D), but also when the suggestive effect during the big win is executed, the character object effect may be executed at a low rate.

Next, when the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b does not execute the character effect (N of step 012IWS908), it determines the presence or absence of the light guide plate effect (step 012IWS909).

Here, a light-transmitting light guide plate 012IW103 that allows light to pass therethrough and a light emitter that allows light to enter from the end surface of the light guide plate are provided on the front surface of the image display device 5. The light guide plate 012IW103 It is assumed that there is provided a reflecting portion that reflects light incident on the inside of the light guide plate 012IW103 from the end face of the light guide plate 012IW103 by the light emitter and emits the light to the front of the game machine. Then, by causing the light emitter to emit light, it is possible to execute a light guide plate presentation in which light is emitted from the reflection portion provided on the light guide plate 012IW103 to the front of the gaming machine. In such a configuration, when the light guide plate effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 8-43 (B3), light is emitted from the reflection portion provided on the light guide plate 012IW103 to the front of the gaming machine, resulting in a "jackpot". characters appear. In addition, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the image displayed on the image display device 5 during execution of the light guide plate effect.

In step 012 IWS 909, by using the light guide plate effect determination table shown in FIG. 8-31(E), the light guide plate effect is executed at different ratios according to the presence or absence of the jackpot suggesting effect and the effect mode when executed. be. Specifically, when the jackpot indicating performance in the first performance mode is executed, the ratio of the light guide plate performance to be performed is high, and the second performance mode, the third performance mode and the fourth performance mode suggesting that the jackpot is in progress. It is configured such that when the performance is executed, the rate at which the light guide plate performance is executed is low. In other words, when the performance suggesting during the big win is executed in a mode of performance that does not suggest that the setting value is advantageous, the proportion of the light guide plate performance being executed is high, and the performance suggesting during the big win is configured to be difficult to visually recognize. there is For example, as shown in FIG. 8-43 (B4), the light guide plate effect is executed when the dialogue A image ("Setting is...") 012IW104 is displayed by the suggesting effect during the jackpot in the first effect mode. Then, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the dialogue A image. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest in the game due to the effect suggesting during the jackpot, which is an undesirable effect mode for the player. When the second performance mode, the third performance mode, and the fourth performance mode suggesting performance during the big hit are executed, the execution timing of either the mid-jackpot suggesting performance or the light guide plate performance is changed (for example, the light guide plate The effect may be performed during the fanfare period, and the suggestive effect during the big hit may be performed during the ending period).

(Ending effect processing)
FIG. 8-32 is a flow chart showing the ending effect processing (step S177) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the ending effect process, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b first subtracts 1 from the value of the effect period measurement timer (step 012IWS951). It should be noted that the effect period measuring timer is set based on the completion of all the rounds of the big win game in the effect process during the big win (see step S176). Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b confirms whether or not the effect period measurement timer has timed out (step 012IWS952).

When the production period measurement timer has not timed out (N of step 012IWS952), the second production control CPU 012IW120b subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 012IWS953), and displays the production device (image display Device 5, game effect lamp 9, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.) are executed (step 012IWS954). For example, an effect such as displaying that the big win is over or displaying a predetermined character is executed.

Then, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b checks whether the process timer has timed out (step 012IWS955), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step 012IWS956). Then, the process timer setting value in the next process data is set in the process timer to start the process timer (step 012IWS957).

If the effect period measuring timer has timed out (Y of step 012IWS952), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the big win game to be finished this time is a big win game based on the probability variable big win (step 012IW958). Whether or not it is a variable probability big hit can be determined, for example, by confirming the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area. If it is not a probability variable jackpot (N of step 012IW958), the process proceeds to step 012IWS961.

If the jackpot game based on the variable probability jackpot is to be terminated (Y in step 012IWS958), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not it has received the V winning designation command (step 012IWS959). If the V winning designation command is received (Y of step 012IWS959), the process proceeds to step 012IWS961.

If the V winning designation command is not received (N of step 012IWS959), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b inputs the date and time information from the real time clock 012IW126, and backs up the backup memory board 099IW14 with the entered date and time information as the probability variation non-establishment date and time. The log information is stored in the log areas provided in the data memories 099IW210A to 210D (step 012IWS960). That is, in this case, the second special variable winning device 012IW007b is opened for a relatively long period of time (in this example, 29.5 seconds). Since it is a case where the game ball does not win in the V winning area in the special variable winning device 012IW007b and is not controlled to the variable probability state, the log information is recorded as the date and time when the variable probability is not established. Then, the process proceeds to step 012 IWS961.

After that, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b updates the value of the effect process flag to "0" (step 012IWS961), and ends the ending effect process.

In this example, a case is shown in which probability variation non-establishment is detected and log information is recorded in the ending period at the end of the jackpot game, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, in this example, since the second special variable winning device 012IW007b is opened in the fourth round during the jackpot game, at the end of the fourth round (when the second special variable winning device 012IW007b is closed after the fourth round) Alternatively, during the 5th round after the 4th round (during the opening of the second special variable winning device 012IW007b in the 5th round), it may be configured to detect whether the probability variation is not established and record the log information. good.

(Error notification process)
8-33 to 8-36 are flow charts showing the error notification process (step 012IWS210). In the error notification process, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b first checks whether or not the first left-handed informing flag indicating that the first left-handed informing is being executed is set (step 012IWS101). If the first left hitting informing flag is not set, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b determines whether the second left hitting informing flag indicating that the second left hitting informing is being executed is set. Confirm (step 012 IWS 102).

If the second left hitting informing flag is not set, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the jackpot game is in progress (step 012IWS103). It should be noted that whether or not the jackpot game is in progress, for example, the value of the production process flag updated in the production control process processing becomes a value indicating the production process during the big hit (step S176) to the ending production process (step S177). It can be determined by confirming whether or not there is If it is not during the jackpot game, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not it is during the high base state (step 012IWS104). Whether or not it is in the high base state, for example, confirms whether a command that can be specified as being in the high base state (for example, probability variable state background designation command, time saving state background designation command) is received can be determined by

If it is not in the high base state (that is, if it is in the low base state), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b checks whether or not it has received a gate passage designation command (step 012IWS105). If the gate passage designation command is received (that is, if the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 012IW041 is detected), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b counts the number of game balls that have passed through the passage gate 012IW041. 1 is added to the value of the gate passage counter for the purpose (step 012IWS106), and it is confirmed whether or not the value of the gate passage counter after addition is 5 (step 012IWS107).

If the value of the gate passage counter is 5, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b performs control to start displaying the left-handed notification display on the image display device 5 (step 012IWS108). For example, the image display device 5 is controlled to start displaying characters such as "Aim left!". In addition, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b sets the first left-handed informing flag (step 012IWS 109). In addition, the second effect control CPU012IW120b sets a value corresponding to a predetermined period (in this example, 5 seconds) to the first left-handed notification timer for measuring the execution period of the first left-handed notification (step 012 IWS 110). That is, in this case, since the game ball is in the low base state and not in the jackpot game, it is originally a case of performing a left-handed operation. 5 times detection means that a right-handed operation is being performed, so the first left-handed information is given to prompt the player to perform a left-handed operation.

If the value of the gate passage counter after addition is not 5, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b checks whether the value of the gate passage counter after addition is 10 (step 012IWS111). If the value of the gate passage counter is 10, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b controls the image display device 5 to start displaying a left-handed notification display (step 012IWS112). For example, the image display device 5 is controlled to start displaying characters such as "Aim left!". In this case, for example, it may be configured to display a large-sized hitting-to-left informing display as compared with the case where the first hitting-to-left informing is executed. Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b performs control to start all lighting of the game effect lamp 9 (step 012IWS113). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b performs control to start outputting a predetermined notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R (step 012IWS114). In addition, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b sets the flag during the second left hitting notification (step 012IWS115). In addition, the second effect control CPU012IW120b sets a value corresponding to a predetermined period (in this example, 33 seconds) to the second left-handed notification timer for measuring the execution period of the second left-handed notification (step 012 IWS 116). That is, in this case, when the game ball is in the low base state and not in the jackpot game, the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 012IW041 provided in the right area of the game area is detected a total of 10 times. Therefore, the second left-handed notification for prompting the player to perform left-handed operation is performed. In addition, CPU012IW120b for 2nd production|presentation control will reset a flag and a 1st hitting left information timer during 1st hitting left information, if set.

In this example, the condition for executing the second left-handed notification is established based on the fact that the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 012IW041 is detected a total of 10 times, whereas the game ball passes through the passage gate 012IW041. Since the execution condition for the first left-handed notification is satisfied based on the fact that the passage is detected a total of five times, the second left-handed notification is performed based on the fact that the execution condition for the first left-handed notification for two is satisfied. The execution condition is satisfied.

In addition, in this example, it is assumed that the execution condition of the left-handed notification is satisfied based on the detection of the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 012IW041 a total of 5 times or 10 times. It is not limited to any form. For example, when the second start winning opening is provided in the right area of the game ball, if the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening is detected even once, the execution condition of the left hitting notification is established. It may be configured to execute left-handed information as a thing.

In addition, the second effect control CPU012IW120b inputs the date and time information from the real-time clock 012IW126, the input date and time information as the left-handed notification date and time log information in the log area provided in the backup data memory 099IW210A ~ 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14 is stored (step 012 IWS 117). In this way, in this example, there are two types of left-handed notifications, the first left-handed notification and the second left-handed notification. The log information is not recorded when the information is recorded and the first left-handed notification with low importance is executed.

If the gate passage designation command is not received (N of step 012IWS105, that is, if the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 012IW041 is detected, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b receives the winning opening prize designation command Confirm whether or not (step 012IWS118) If the winning opening winning designation command is received (that is, if the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening 10 is detected), the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b The value of the gate passage counter is cleared to 0 (step 012IWS119).In other words, the reception of the winning hole winning designation command means that the winning of the game ball to the general winning hole 10 provided in the left area of the game area is detected and the player is performing a left-handed operation, the value of the gate passage counter is cleared to zero.

Also, when the jackpot game is in progress (step 012IWS103 Y), or in the case of the high base state (step 012IWS104 Y), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b proceeds to step 012IWS119 and counts the gate passing counter. The value is cleared to 0 (step 012IWS119). That is, the value of the gate passing counter is cleared to 0 because the fact that the player is in the jackpot game or in the high base state means that the right-handed operation is performed.

When the flag during the first left hitting notification is set (Y in step 012IWS101), that is, when the first left hitting information is being executed, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b notifies the first left hitting information. Check whether the timer has timed out (step 012 IWS 120). If the first hitting-to-left notification timer has timed out, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b performs control to terminate the display of hitting-to-left notification display on the image display device 5 (step 012IWS121). In addition, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b resets the first left-handed informing flag (step 012IWS122).

When the second hitting left informing flag is set (Y in step 012IWS 102), that is, when the second hitting left is being executed, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b notifies the second hitting left It is checked whether the timer has timed out (step 012 IWS 123). If the second hitting-to-left notification timer has timed out, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b performs control to terminate the display of hitting-to-left notification display on the image display device 5 (step 012IWS124). In addition, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b performs control to end all lighting of the game effect lamp 9 (step 012IWS125), and performs control to end output of a predetermined notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R (step 012IWS126). ). In addition, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b resets the second hitting to left informing flag (step 012IWS127). Also, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b clears the value of the gate passage counter to 0 (step 012IWS128).

In addition, in this example, detection of the winning of the game ball into the general winning hole 10, the fact that the jackpot game is in progress, the fact that the high base state is in progress, and the notification period (33 seconds) of the second left-handed notification are detected. Although the case where the value of the gate passage counter is cleared to 0 based on the passage of time is shown, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the value of the gate passage counter is cleared to 0 based on the detection of the winning of the game ball into the general winning opening 10, the fact that the jackpot game is in progress, and the fact that the high base state is in progress. The value of the gate passage counter may not be cleared even after the notification period (33 seconds) of the left-handed notification has passed, and various processing modes are conceivable.

Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the first full-tank informing flag indicating that the first full-tank informing is being executed is set (step 012IWS129). If the first full tank notification flag is not set, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b determines whether the second full tank notification flag indicating that the second full tank notification is being executed is set. Confirm (step 012 IWS 130).

If the second full-tank informing flag is not set, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b checks whether or not a full-tank detection command has been received (step 012IWS131). If the full tank detection command is received, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b checks whether or not the full tank flag indicating that the full tank state of the batted ball supply tray (lower tray) is being detected is set. Confirm (step 012 IWS 132). If the full tank flag is not set, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b sets the full tank flag (step 012IWS133) and measures the duration of the full tank state of the batted ball supply tray (lower tray). A full tank timer is set (step 012IWS134).

If the full-tank flag is set, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b checks whether the value of the full-tank timer corresponds to 10 seconds (step 012IWS135). If the value of the full-tank timer is a value corresponding to 10 seconds (that is, if the batted ball supply tray (lower tray) continues to be filled for 10 seconds), the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b The image display device 5 is controlled to start displaying the full tank notification display (step 012IWS136). For example, the image display device 5 is controlled to start displaying characters such as "The lower tray is full!". In addition, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b sets the first full tank informing flag (step 012IWS137). In addition, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b sets a value corresponding to a predetermined period (in this example, 5 seconds) to the first full tank notification timer for measuring the execution period of the first full tank notification (step 012 IWS 138).

If the value of the timer during full tank is not a value corresponding to 10 seconds, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b confirms whether the value of the timer during full tank is a value corresponding to 30 seconds (step 012IWS139 ). If the value of the full-tank timer is a value corresponding to 30 seconds (that is, if the batted ball supply tray (lower tray) continues to be filled for 30 seconds), the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b The image display device 5 is controlled to start displaying the full-tank notification display (step 012IWS140). For example, the image display device 5 is controlled to start displaying characters such as "The bottom tray is full!". In this case, for example, the full-tank notification display may be displayed in a larger size than when the first full-tank notification is performed. Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b performs control to start all lighting of the game effect lamp 9 (step 012IWS141). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b performs control to start outputting a predetermined notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R (step 012IWS142). In addition, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b sets a second full-tank informing flag (step 012IWS143). In addition, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b sets a value corresponding to a predetermined period (in this example, 33 seconds) to the second full tank notification timer for measuring the execution period of the second full tank notification (step 012 IWS 144). It should be noted that the second effect control CPU012IW120b, if set, resets the first full tank notification flag and the first full tank notification timer.

In this example, when the second full tank notification is executed, the game effect lamp 9 is fully lit and a predetermined notification sound is output in the same manner as when the second left-handed notification is executed. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the configuration may be such that either all of the game effect lamps 9 are lit or a predetermined notification sound is output, or only a portion of the game effect lamps 9 may be illuminated. good.

In addition, the second effect control CPU012IW120b inputs the date and time information from the real-time clock 012IW126, the input date and time information as the full tank notification date and time log information in the log area provided in the backup data memory 099IW210A ~ 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14 is stored (step 012IWS145). Thus, in this example, there are two kinds of full-tank notifications, the first full-tank notification and the second full-tank notification. Log information is not recorded when executing the first full-tank notification, which is recorded as information and has a low importance.

On the other hand, if the full tank detection command is not received (step 012IWS131 N), that is, if the full tank state of the batted ball supply tray (lower tray) is not detected, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b is set. If so, the full tank flag is reset and the full tank timer is reset (step 012 IWS 146).

When the first full-tank notification flag is set (Y in step 012IWS129), that is, when the first full-tank notification is being executed, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b outputs the first full-tank notification. It is checked whether the timer has timed out (step 012 IWS 147). If the first full-tank notification timer has timed out, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b performs control to terminate the display of the full-tank notification display on the image display device 5 (step 012IWS148). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b resets the first full tank informing flag (step 012IWS149).

When the second full-tank notification flag is set (Y in step 012IWS130), that is, when the second full-tank notification is being executed, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b outputs the second full-tank notification. Check whether the timer has timed out (step 012 IWS 150). If the second full-tank notification timer has timed out, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b performs control to terminate the display of the left-handed notification display on the image display device 5 (step 012IWS151). In addition, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b performs control to terminate all lighting of the game effect lamp 9 (step 012IWS152), and performs control to terminate output of a predetermined notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R (step 012IWS153). ). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b resets the second full tank informing flag (step 012IWS154). In addition, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b resets the full tank flag and resets the full tank timer (step 012IWS155).

(Maintenance mode processing)
FIG. 8-37 is a flowchart showing maintenance mode processing (step 012IWS211). In the maintenance mode process, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b first checks whether or not the maintenance mode flag indicating that the maintenance mode is in progress is set (step 012IWS451). If the maintenance mode flag is not set, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b checks whether or not the setting confirmation flag indicating that the setting is being confirmed is set (step 012IWS452).

If the setting confirmation flag is not set, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b confirms whether or not the setting confirmation command is received (step 012IWS453). If the setting confirmation command is received, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b controls the image display device 5 to start displaying the setting confirmation display (step 012IWS454). For example, the image display device 5 is controlled to start displaying characters such as "Confirming settings". Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b sets a setting confirmation flag (step 012IWS455).

If the setting confirmation flag is set (Y of step 012IWS452), the second effect control CPU012IW120b is whether the push button 31B is turned on (specifically, the detection signal from the push sensor 35B is input (step 012 IWS 456). If the push button 31B is ON, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b performs control to start displaying the maintenance mode menu screen on the image display device 5 (step 012IWS457). In addition, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b sets the maintenance mode flag (step 012IWS458).

As described above, by executing the processing of steps 012IWS452 to S458, in this example, maintenance is performed based on the fact that the push button 31B is pressed during the confirmation of the settings when the game machine is turned on. mode, and the display of the maintenance mode menu screen is started.

If the push button 31B is not turned on (N of step 012IWS456), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not a command for restoration has been received (step 012IWS459). If the command at the time of restoration is received, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b performs control to end the display of the setting confirmation in progress display on the image display device 5 (step 012IWS460). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b resets the setting confirmation flag (step 012IWS461). That is, the fact that the command for restoration is received during the setting confirmation means that the setting key 012IW051 is turned off by the player, and the setting confirmation process ends (N in step 012IWS043, see step 012IWS049). Controls to end the display of the confirming display.

If the maintenance mode flag is set (Y in step 012IWS451), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b checks whether or not it has detected that the maintenance history selection operation has been performed by the player (step 012IWS462). . For example, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b checks whether it has detected that the maintenance history selection operation has been performed, based on the detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B. If it is detected that the maintenance history selection operation is performed, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b extracts all log information from the log area provided in the backup data memory 099IW 210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW 14 (step 012 IWS 463). Strictly speaking, at step 012 IWS 463, only the log information for the game shop is read, and the log information for the game machine maker is not read. Then, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b performs control to display a maintenance history screen including the extracted log information as history information in the image display device 5 (step 012IWS464).

If the maintenance history selection operation is not detected (N of step 012IWS462), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not it has detected that the player has performed the setting change/confirmation history selection operation ( step 012 IWS 465). For example, the second effect control CPU012IW120b, based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B, confirms whether or not it has detected that the setting change / confirmation history selection operation was performed. If it is detected that the setting change / confirmation history selection operation is performed, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b is provided in the backup data memory 099IW 210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW 14 Log information stored in the log area All the log information of setting change and setting confirmation is extracted from the above (step 012 IWS 466). Then, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b controls the image display device 5 to display a setting change/confirmation history screen including the extracted setting change and setting confirmation log information as history information (step 012IWS467).

If it is not detected that the setting change/confirmation history selection operation is performed (N of step 012IWS465), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the command at the time of restoration is received (step 012IWS468). . If the command at the time of recovery is received, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b performs control to erase the maintenance mode menu screen, the maintenance history screen, and the setting change/confirmation history screen in the image display device 5 (step 012IWS469). . Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b resets the maintenance mode flag (step 012IWS470). That is, the fact that the command for restoration is received during the setting confirmation means that the setting key 012IW051 is turned off by the player, and the setting confirmation process ends (N in step 012IWS043, see step 012IWS049). Control to end the mode.

In this example, it is determined that the setting key 012IW051 has been turned off based on the reception of the recovery command, and the maintenance mode is ended, but the mode is not limited to this. For example, in this example, when the setting key 012IW051 is turned off, a setting value command is also transmitted (see step 012IWS047). may be configured to terminate

(Setting change time recording process)
FIG. 8-38 is a flow chart showing the setting change time recording process (step 012 IWS 212). In the setting change time recording process, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b first checks whether or not a setting change command is received (step 012IWS801). If the setting change command is received, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b inputs the date and time information from the real time clock 012IW 126, and stores the entered date and time information as the setting change start date and time in the backup data memory 099IW 210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW 14. Log information is stored in the provided log area (step 012 IWS 802). In addition, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b sets a setting change command reception flag indicating that the setting change command has been received (step 012IWS803).

If the setting change command is not received (N of step 012IWS801), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b checks whether or not the setting confirmation command is received (step 012IWS804). If the setting confirmation command is received, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b inputs the date and time information from the real-time clock 012IW 126, and stores the entered date and time information as the setting confirmation start date and time in the backup data memory 099IW 210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW 14. Log information is stored in the provided log area (step 012 IWS 805). Also, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b sets a setting confirmation command reception flag indicating that the setting confirmation command has been received (step 012IWS 806).

If the setting confirmation command is not received (N of step 012IWS804), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the initialization designation command is received (step 012IWS807). If the initialization designation command is received, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b checks whether or not the setting change command reception flag is set (step 012IWS808). If the setting change command reception flag is not set (that is, if the setting change process is not executed and only the initialization process is executed), the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b receives date and time information from the real time clock 012IW 126. , and the log information is stored in the log area provided in the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14 as the RAM clear date and time (step 012IWS809).

On the other hand, if the setting change command reception flag is not set (Y in step 012IWS808), that is, if both the setting change process and the initialization process are executed, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b stores the set value in the RAM 012IW 122b. The current set value stored in the area is read (step 012 IWS810). In this example, when the setting change process is executed, the set value command is transmitted before the initialization designation command (see steps 012IWS047 and S052). should be stored. Then, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b inputs the date and time information from the real-time clock 012IW 126, associates it with the read setting value, and uses the entered date and time information as the setting change end date and time as the backup data memory 099IW 210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW 14. The log information is stored in the log area provided in (step 012 IWS 811). In addition, CPU012IW120b for 2nd production|presentation control resets the setting change command reception flag which was set.

In this example, when the setting change process is executed by executing the processes of steps 012 IWS810 and S811, the initialization process should also be executed, but only the log information related to the setting change is recorded. However, by omitting recording of log information related to RAM clearing, unnecessary recording of log information is prevented.

If the initialization command is not received (N of step 012IWS807), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b checks whether or not the command at the time of recovery is received (step 012IWS812). If the command at the time of recovery is received, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b checks whether or not the setting confirmation command reception flag is set (step 012IWS813). If the setting confirmation command reception flag is not set (that is, if the setting confirmation process is not executed and only the recovery process is executed), the process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the setting confirmation command reception flag is not set (Y of step 012IWS813), that is, if both the setting confirmation process and the recovery process are executed, the second effect control CPU012IW120b stores the setting value storage area of the RAM012IW122b. (Step 012 IWS 814). Then, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b inputs the date and time information from the real-time clock 012IW 126, associates it with the read setting value, and uses the entered date and time information as the setting confirmation end date and time as the backup data memory 099IW 210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW 14. The log information is stored in the log area provided in (step 012 IWS 815). In addition, CPU012IW120b for 2nd production|presentation control resets the setting confirmation command reception flag which was set.

In this example, when the setting confirmation process is not executed and only the recovery process is executed, the log information is not recorded, but the log information may be recorded. In this case, for example, when step 012IWS813 is N, the date and time information is input from the real-time clock 012IW126, and the input date and time information is used as the restoration date and time to be logged in the log areas provided in the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14. It may be configured to store information.

(Current time setting process)
FIG. 8-39 is a flow chart showing the current time setting process (step 012IWS213). In the current time setting process, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b first checks whether or not the maintenance mode flag is set (step 012IWS821). If the maintenance mode flag is set (that is, if the maintenance mode is in progress), the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b determines whether the current time setting flag indicating that the current time is being set is set. (Step 012IWS822).

If the current time setting flag is not set, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b checks whether or not it has detected that the player has performed the current time setting selection operation (step 012IWS823). For example, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b checks whether or not it has detected that the current time setting selection operation has been performed, based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B. If it is detected that the current time setting selection operation has been performed, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b performs control to start displaying the current time setting screen on the image display device 5 (step 012IWS824). In addition, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b sets the current time setting flag (step 012IWS825).

If the current time setting flag is set (Y of step 012IWS822), the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b is set to a waiting flag indicating that it is waiting until the log information of the current time setting is recorded. (step 012IWS826). If the waiting flag is not set, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b checks whether or not the hour signal is received from the first effect control CPU 012IW120a (step 012IWS827).

In this example, as already explained, the detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B are first input to the first effect control CPU 012IW120a, so that the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are operated by the player. When the setting information of the current time is input, a signal capable of specifying the input setting information of the current time is sequentially transmitted from the first effect control CPU 012IW120a to the second effect control CPU 012IW120b. In this case, in this example, the hour signal indicating the hour, the minute signal indicating the minute, the second signal indicating the second, the year signal indicating the year, the month signal indicating the month, the day signal indicating the day, and the day of the week are displayed. It is transmitted in the order of the indicated day of the week signal. Also, in this example, as already described, the first effect control CPU012IW120a generates a timer interrupt every 10 ms, and these signals are transmitted every 10 ms.

If the hour signal is received (Y of step 012IWS827), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets the hour information of the real-time clock 012IW126 to the time indicated by the received hour signal (step 012IWS828). In addition, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b sets a value corresponding to 500ms to the waiting timer for measuring the waiting period until the log information of the current time setting is recorded (step 012IWS829). Also, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b sets a waiting flag (step 012IWS830).

If the waiting flag is set (Y of step 012IWS826), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b checks whether or not the waiting timer has timed out (step 012IWS831). If the standby timer has not timed out, the second effect control CPU012IW120b received either the minute signal, the second signal, the year signal, the month signal, the day signal, or the day of the week signal from the first effect control CPU012IW120a? Confirm whether or not (step 012IWS832).

If any signal is received (Y of step 012IWS832), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets the information of the real-time clock 012IW126 to the information indicated by the received signal (step 012IWS833). For example, when the minute signal is received, the minute information of the real-time clock 012IW 126 is set to the minute indicated by the received minute signal. Also, for example, when a second signal is received, the second information of the real-time clock 012IW 126 is set to the second indicated by the received second signal. Also, for example, when the year signal is received, the year information of the real-time clock 012IW 126 is set to the year indicated by the received year signal. Also, for example, when the month signal is received, the month information of the real-time clock 012IW 126 is set to the month indicated by the received month signal. Further, for example, when the date signal is received, the date information of the real-time clock 012IW 126 is set to the date indicated by the received date signal. Further, for example, when a day-of-the-week signal is received, the day-of-the-week information of the real-time clock 012IW 126 is set to the day of the week indicated by the received day-of-the-week signal.

If the standby timer has timed out (Y of step 012IWS831), that is, if 500 ms has passed since the time signal was first received, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b is, from the real-time clock 012IW 126, hour, minute, The date and time information of seconds, year, month, date, and day of the week are read (step 012 IWS 834). Then, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b stores the log information in the log area provided in the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14 as the time setting date and time based on the read date and time information (step 012IWS835). In addition, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b resets the current time setting flag and the waiting flag (step 012IWS836).

FIG. 8-40 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the setting timing of the current time. When the player operates the stick controller 31A or push button 31B to set the current time, detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and push sensor 35B are first input to the first effect control CPU 012IW120a. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-40, the hour signal, minute signal, second signal, year signal, month signal, day signal, and day of the week signal are set every 10 ms for the first effect control according to the setting operation by the player. It is sequentially transmitted from the CPU012IW120a to the second effect control CPU012IW120b.

When receiving these signals, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b immediately sets the information of the real-time clock 012IW126 based on the received signals, as shown in FIG. 8-40. As shown in FIG. 8-40, when the hour signal is received, the hour information of the real-time clock 012IW126 is immediately set based on the received hour signal. When the minute signal is received 10 ms later, the minute information of the real-time clock 012IW126 is immediately set based on the received minute signal. Further, when the second signal is received 10 ms later, the second information of the real-time clock 012IW126 is immediately set based on the received second signal. Also, when the year signal is received 10 ms later, the year information of the real-time clock 012IW126 is immediately set based on the received year signal. Also, when the moon signal is received 10 ms later, the month information of the real-time clock 012IW126 is immediately set based on the received moon signal. When the date signal is received 10 ms later, the date information of the real-time clock 012IW126 is immediately set based on the received date signal. Furthermore, when the day-of-the-week signal is received 10 ms later, the day-of-the-week information of the real-time clock 012IW 126 is immediately set based on the received day-of-the-week signal.

On the other hand, the log information of the time setting date and time is not recorded immediately, but the standby timer is set when the first hour signal is received, and when the standby timer times out, the hour is displayed as shown in Fig. 8-40. After waiting until 500 ms has passed since the signal was received, the date and time information is read from the real-time clock 012IW 126 and recorded in the log information as the time setting date and time.

It should be noted that if the player further operates to set the current time before 500 ms has passed since the hour signal was received, another hour signal, minute signal, second signal, Although the information of the real time clock 012IW 126 may be set by receiving the year signal, month signal, date signal, and day of the week signal, in this example, the information of the real time clock 012IW 126 is set whenever these signals are received. Therefore, the log information of the time setting date and time is recorded based on the date and time information of the real-time clock 012IW 126 set based on the last received signal.

If the hour signal, minute signal, second signal, year signal, month signal, date signal, and day of the week signal that are individually sent are recorded as log information each time they are received, the log information for the current time setting will become more redundant than necessary. However, in this example, as shown in FIG. 8-40, it is configured to wait until all signals related to time setting are received before recording the log information of the time setting date and time. It prevents redundancy.

In addition, in this example, apart from the second effect control CPU012IW120b, the case where the first effect control CPU012IW120a to which the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B is primarily input is provided. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, an input circuit is provided for receiving detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B, and the hour signal, minute signal, second signal, year signal, month signal, date signal, and day of the week signal are sequentially output from the input circuit. You may be comprised so that it may be transmitted to CPU012IW120b for 2nd production|presentation control. As long as it is configured such that the signal corresponding to the operation in some form is sequentially transmitted to the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b.

In addition, in this example, the case where the real-time clock 012IW126 is mounted on the side of the second effect control board 012IW12b is shown. Accordingly, the first effect control CPU 012IW 120a side may be configured to update the date and time information of the real-time clock at any time. Then, the first effect control CPU012IW120a transmits the updated date and time information of the real-time clock to the second effect control CPU012IW120b, the second effect control CPU012IW120b updates the counter and the like based on the received date and time information, date and time may be configured to manage

(power outage date and time record processing)
FIG. 8-41 is a flow chart showing the power failure date and time recording process (step 012IWS214). In the power interruption date and time recording process, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b first checks whether or not a temporary storage enable flag indicating that the temporary storage of date and time information from the real-time clock 012IW 126 is permitted is set (step 012IWS841). ). If the temporary storage enabled flag is set, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b checks whether the temporary storage timer for measuring the time to temporarily store the date and time information from the real time clock 012IW 126 has timed out ( step 012 IWS 842). If the temporary storage timer has timed out, the second effect control CPU012IW120b reads the date and time information from the real-time clock 012IW126, and stores the read date and time information in a temporary area provided in the RAM012IW122b (step 012IWS843). Also, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b sets a value corresponding to 100 ms to the temporary storage timer (step 012IWS844).

In addition, the date and time information is stored in the temporary area of the RAM 012IW 122b every 100 ms. shall be stored in the area.

If the temporary storage enable flag is not set (N of step 012IWS841), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not an initialization designation command or a command at the time of recovery is received (step 012IWS845). If the initialization designation command or the command at the time of recovery is received, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b is provided in the backup data memory 099IW 210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW 14 Log information of the previous power-on date and time in the log area is stored (step 012IWS846). If the log information of the previous power-on date and time is not stored (N of step 012IWS846), the process proceeds to step 012IWS849. If the log information of the previous power-on date and time is stored (Y in step 012IWS846), the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b reads the date and time information stored in the temporary area of the RAM 012IW 122b, and disconnects the read date and time information. The log information is stored as the date and time in the log area provided in the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14 (step 012IWS847). Then, the process proceeds to step 012 IWS849.

If neither the initialization command nor the command at the time of recovery is received (N of step 012IWS845), the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b will issue other commands (however, power-on such as setting confirmation command and setting change command ) has been received (step 012 IWS 848). If other commands have been received, for example, if a variation pattern command or a display result designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step 012 IWS849.

At step 012IWS849, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets a temporary storage flag (step 012IWS849). Also, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b sets a value corresponding to 100 ms to the temporary storage timer (step 012IWS844).

In addition, when the temporary storage flag is set at step 012IWS849, it is maintained until the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped or the system reset of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b occurs. Then, when the effect control main process shown in FIG. 8-18 is started due to power-on to the game machine or occurrence of system reset, etc., it shall be reset by the initialization process of step 012 IWS201.

FIG. 8-42 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the recording timing of the log information of the date and time of power failure. As shown in FIG. 8-42, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is determined to be Y in step 012IWS841 of the power interruption date and time recording process when the second effect control CPU012IW120b is being activated, and steps 012IWS842 to S844. is executed, the date and time information is temporarily stored in the temporary area of the RAM 012IW 122b every 100 ms.

Then, when the power supply to the game machine is stopped or the system reset of the second effect control CPU012IW120b occurs, and the initialization process (see step 012IWS201) is executed and the temporary storage flag is reset, the second effect control Even if the CPU 012IW 120b returns to the active state, it is determined as N in step 012IWS 841 of the power failure date and time recording process, and the temporary storage of the date and time information every 100 ms is not executed, and the last stored in the temporary area of the RAM 012IW 122b. Date and time information is maintained.

If the power supply to the game machine is stopped and then the power supply to the game machine is started, at least the initialization designation command or the recovery command should be received. Therefore, in this example, as shown in FIG. 8-42 (1), on the condition that an initialization specifying command or a recovery command is received, the date and time information maintained in the temporary area is read, and the read date and time The log information is stored in the log area provided in the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14 as the power failure date and time (step 012IWS845: Y, step 012IWS847). After that, the temporary storage enable flag is set, and the temporary storage of date and time information every 100 ms is resumed (see steps 012IWS849 and S850). However, in this example, the log information of the power-on date and time is also recorded (see step 012 IWS 203). Since there is a possibility that some kind of abnormality has occurred, in this case, the log information of the date and time of the power failure is not recorded (see step 012 IWS846 N).

On the other hand, if a system reset of the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b occurs, the power supply to the game machine itself is not stopped, and an initialization designation command or a command at the time of restoration from the game control microcomputer 100 Power-up commands are not sent. Therefore, in this example, as shown in FIG. 8-42 (2), if the command for specifying initialization or the command for recovery is not received, it is determined that the power failure of the game machine itself has not occurred. Then, the date and time information maintained in the temporary area is controlled so as not to record the log information as the power failure date and time. In this case, as shown in FIG. 8-42 (2), based on the reception of other commands (excluding commands sent when the power is turned on, such as setting confirmation commands and setting change commands), for example, Based on the reception of the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, etc., the temporary storage enable flag is set, and the temporary storage of the date and time information every 100 ms is restarted (see steps 012 IWS849 and S850).

If it is configured to record the log information of the date and time of power failure only based on the detection of the stop of the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b side, when the system reset etc. of the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b occurs (the When the power supply of the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b is temporarily stopped due to system reset of the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b, etc.), the log information of the power failure date and time is recorded, and the game There is a possibility that the log information of the date and time of the power outage may be recorded even though the power outage of the machine itself did not occur. Therefore, in this example, as shown in FIG. 8-42, the date and time when the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b is stopped is temporarily stored as a temporary power failure date and time, and the initialization designation command, the command at the time of restoration, etc. On the condition that the power-on command is received, the log information of the date and time of power failure is formally recorded to prevent such a situation from occurring.

In this example, it is determined that a power failure has occurred in the game machine itself, and the date and time of the power failure is recorded in the log information on the condition that an initialization command or a command for restoration has been received. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the date and time of the power failure may be recorded in the log information based on the reception of other commands transmitted when the power is turned on, such as a setting confirmation command and a setting change command. Further, in the process of step 099IWS001 of the effect control main process, it may be determined that the power failure of the game machine itself has occurred based on the fact that the power supply disconnection signal is input from the power monitor circuit 099IW127.

Next, a specific example of the display screen during maintenance mode will be described. 8-45 to 8-48 are explanatory diagrams for explaining specific examples of display screens during the maintenance mode. In FIGS. 8-45 to 8-48, the display screen transitions in the order of (A), (B), (C), . . .

First, with reference to FIGS. 8-45 and 8-46, a specific example of a display screen when a maintenance history selection operation is performed during maintenance mode will be described. When the setting confirmation command is received when the power supply to the gaming machine is started, a character display such as "Confirming setting" is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 8-45(A). , the setting confirmation display is started (see steps 012 IWS453 to S455). In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-45(A), when the setting confirmation display is being displayed, the image display device 5 displays a character display such as "Press the push button to shift to maintenance mode." and a display prompting an operation to shift to maintenance mode is displayed.

Next, when the player presses the push button 31B, the maintenance mode menu screen is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 8-45(B), and the maintenance mode is entered (see steps 012IWS456-S458). As shown in Fig. 8-45(B), the maintenance mode menu screen displays options of "maintenance history", "setting change/confirmation history", and "current time setting", and the current time is displayed. is displayed.

When the “maintenance history” option 012IW106 is selected, the image display device 5 switches to display the maintenance history screen as shown in FIG. 8-45(C). As shown in FIG. 8-45(C), on the maintenance history screen, date and time and log contents are displayed in association with each other, and the latest log information is displayed in order from the top. In the example shown in FIG. 8-45(C), an illegal winning error indicating detection of illegal winning to a winning opening such as the first big winning opening or the second big winning opening, the first count switch 012IW023a and the second count Log information of a switch abnormality error indicating that an abnormality of various switches such as the switch 012IW023b was detected, a prize error indicating that a prize abnormality was detected, and a magnet error indicating that an abnormal magnetism was detected is displayed. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 8-45 (C), the log information to the effect that probability variation not established is also displayed (see steps 012 IWS958 to S960).

Also, if the maintenance history screen has a plurality of pages, performing the selection operation for the next page will shift to the second page of the maintenance history screen, as shown in FIG. 8-45(D). In the example shown in FIG. 8-45(D), the log information of the start of setting change and the end of setting change (see steps 012 IWS802 and S811), and the log information of the date and time of power failure and power on are displayed (step 012IWS203, S847). In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 8-45(D), the log information of left driving notification and full tank notification are also displayed (see steps 012 IWS117 and S145).

If there is a next page, selecting the next page moves to the third page of the maintenance history screen as shown in FIG. When the selection operation is performed, the screen moves to the fourth page of the maintenance history screen as shown in FIG. 8-46(F). In the example shown in FIG. 8-46(E), the log information of the start of setting confirmation and the end of setting confirmation are displayed (see steps 012 IWS805 and S815), and the current time was set during maintenance mode during setting confirmation. Log information to that effect is also displayed (see step 012 IWS835).

In this example, when the current time is set, the date and time information after setting is read and the log information is recorded. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 8-46(E), the setting check was started at 09:36:28 on 03/21/2018 (Wednesday), but the current time was set at It is set to 09:36:16 on Wednesday, March 21, 2018, which is earlier than the start of the setting confirmation. As described above, in this example, even if the date and time become inconsistent before and after setting the current time, the log information is recorded in the log area in the order in which the log information was generated. , the log information is displayed in the order in which it occurred.

Also, in the example shown in FIG. 8-46(F), log information of an RWM abnormality error (see steps 012IWS017 to S020) indicating that some kind of RAM abnormality has occurred when the gaming machine is powered on is displayed. Then, since the RWM abnormal error occurred, the game clerk temporarily stopped the power supply to the game machine, turned on the clear switch, and turned on the power again. Log information indicating that the conversion process has been executed is also displayed (see step IWS809).

Next, with reference to FIG. 8-47, a specific example of a display screen when a setting change/confirmation history selection operation is performed during the maintenance mode will be described. While the setting confirmation display shown in FIG. 8-47(A) is being displayed, the player presses the push button 31B to display the maintenance mode menu screen shown in FIG. 8-47(B). It is assumed that the option 012IW107 of "setting change/confirmation history" is selected during display.

When the option 012IW107 of "setting change/confirmation history" is selected, the display of the setting change/confirmation history screen is switched on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 8-47(C). As shown in Fig. 8-47(C), on the setting change/confirmation history screen, the date and time, whether it is a setting change or a setting confirmation, and the setting value after change or the setting value that has been confirmed are displayed in association with each other. are displayed in order, with the most recent log information at the top.

Next, with reference to FIG. 8-48, a specific example of the display screen when the current time setting selection operation is performed during the maintenance mode will be described. While the setting confirmation display shown in FIG. 8-48(A) is being displayed, the player presses the push button 31B to display the maintenance mode menu screen shown in FIG. 8-48(B). It is assumed that the option 012IW108 of "current time setting" is selected during display.

When the option 012IW108 of "current time setting" is selected, the display is switched to the current time setting screen on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 8-48(C). As shown in FIGS. 8-48(C) and 8-48(D), tilting the stick controller 31A to the left or right selects the year, month, date, day of the week, hour, minute, or second, and the stick A number for each item is selected by tilting the controller 31A back and forth. For example, if you want to change the hour from 16 to 15 in the state shown in FIG. The tilting operation is performed once in the forward direction (toward the player) to change from "16" to "15". Then, as shown in FIG. 8-48(D), when the player presses the push button 31B, the current date and time is set to the date and time currently being displayed.

In addition, in this characteristic part 099IW, the character effect and the light guide plate effect are executed in such a manner that it is difficult to recognize the suggesting effect during the big hit. The display is also executed in such a manner that it is difficult to recognize the suggesting effect during the big win. That is, the error display is displayed with priority over the suggesting effect during the big hit (or the suggesting effect before the game or the suggesting effect during the game). With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately notify the occurrence of an error. In addition, when a predetermined performance (for example, a specific mode of performance among fanfare performances) that can be executed at the same time as the suggestive performance during the big win is provided, and the predetermined performance is in a mode that makes it difficult to recognize the suggestive performance during the big win. In this case, priority may be given to the suggesting effect during the big hit. Specifically, when the image displayed on the image display device 5 by the predetermined effect is in a mode that makes it difficult to recognize the image displayed by the suggestive effect during the big win, the effect is displayed by the suggestive effect during the big win. Images may be preferentially displayed. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it easier to recognize the suggestive effect during the big hit.

In addition, in this characteristic part 099IW, the decorative pattern is variably displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and the decorative pattern is variably displayed by driving the drum-shaped movable body on which the decorative pattern is arranged on the surface. (that is, it may be applied to a so-called drum-type game machine). Alternatively, by driving a belt-like movable body having a decorative pattern on its surface, the decorative pattern may be variably displayed (that is, it may be applied to a so-called belt reel type game machine). In such a drum-type or belt-reel type gaming machine, when the initial fluctuation starts after the setting is changed, the drum-shaped or belt-shaped movable body performs a characteristic operation different from normal (or characteristic behavior may occur). Therefore, in the initial variation after the setting change, a light guide plate rendering that makes the movable body difficult to see at the start of variation may be executed (or the execution ratio may be increased). With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the setting has been changed.

In addition, in this characteristic part 099IW, the character effect and the light guide plate effect are configured so as to reduce the visibility of the effect suggesting during the big hit, but instead of or in addition to such a configuration, For example, the visibility of the initial appearance effect, the pre-game suggestive effect, and the during-game suggestive effect may be reduced by executing the accessory effect and the light guide plate effect. Also in this case, visibility may be lowered at a high rate when an undesirable suggestion is given to the player. For example, when an even initial outcome is displayed, when the pre-game suggestive effect of the first effect mode is executed, or when the suggestive effect during the game of the first effect mode is executed, the visibility of these is reduced. It is also possible to increase the ratio of execution of the character effect in which the movable member moves and the light guide plate effect in which characters and pictures are displayed on the light guide plate. In addition, not only the performance of the role and the performance of the light guide plate, but also the control of outputting a predetermined sound, the control of vibrating the movable member and the stick controller 31A, and the control of emitting light from a decorative light emitter such as a decorative LED in a predetermined manner. , the player's attention may be directed elsewhere, and the visibility of the initial appearance effect, pre-game suggestive effect, and during-game suggestive effect may be reduced (or made difficult to notice).

Also, in addition to the effect suggesting the setting of the characteristic part 099IW, the simultaneous effect executed based on the measurement result (measurement result using the measurement timer set when the power is turned on or the real-time clock 012IW126) is executed in a specific mode. setting may be suggested.

In addition, depending on the number of times that the variable display is performed continuously without the pending memory becoming 0, or the number of times that the starting prize exceeding the maximum number of pending memories occurs, a setting suggestion effect (for example, a predetermined image display control, output control of a predetermined sound, light emission control of a predetermined lamp, etc.) may be executed.

Further, based on detection of the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B during a predetermined operation effective period, a setting suggestion effect (for example, display control of a predetermined image, output control of a predetermined sound, predetermined light emission control of the lamp, etc.) may be executed.

The characteristic part 099IW has been described above with reference to the drawings, but the specific configuration is not limited to that shown in this example, and even if there are changes and additions within the scope of the present invention, the present invention can be applied. included.

(Modification 1)
For example, in the characteristic part 099IW, the security cover 012IW500A is fixed to the outer frame 012IW001a. good too. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-49(A) and 8-49(B), a security cover 012IW500B consisting of a short piece 012IW500Ba and a long piece 012IW500Bb is attached to the substrate case 012IW201, for example. The right end of the long piece 012IW500Bb is slidable in the left-right direction between a covering position covering the right side of the board case 012IW201 including the setting key 012IW051 and a covering release position on the right side of the covering position.

On the other hand, when the game machine frame 012IW003 is opened, the security cover 012IW500B is slid to the right with respect to the board case 012IW201, and set through the through hole 012IW500Bc formed on the left side of the long piece 012IW500Bb. The key 012IW051 should be made operable. That is, in the present modification 1, when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed, the security cover 012IW500B (long piece 012IW500Bb) covers the setting key 012IW051, and the substrate case 012IW201 cannot be slid horizontally. The pachinko game machine 1 is maintained in a regulated state by being regulated. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is open, the security cover 012IW500B is slid to the right with respect to the board case 012IW201 to release the covering of the setting key 012IW051, thereby opening the pachinko gaming machine 1. The restricted state can be released (can be changed to the permitted state).

More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-49(A) and 8-49(B), when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed, the projection dimension of the security cover 012IW500B from the substrate case 012IW201 is L1. On the other hand, when the game machine frame 012IW003 is opened, the security cover 012IW500B is slid with respect to the board case 012IW201, thereby extending the projection dimension of the security cover 012IW500B from the board case 012IW201 to length L2. (L2>L1).

In other words, as shown in FIG. 8-50(A), when the game machine frame 012IW003 is opened by rotating around a predetermined rotation axis, the security cover 012IW500B projects from the board case 012IW201. By sliding with respect to the board case 012IW201 until the length L2 is reached (putting the pachinko game machine 1 in the allowable state), the set value of the pachinko game machine 1 can be set by operating the setting key 012IW051. can be changed. On the other hand, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the allowable state, as shown in FIG. On the other hand, if the security cover 012IW500B is not slid (unless the pachinko game machine 1 is changed to the restricted state), the security cover 012IW500B comes into contact with the front end of the outer frame 012IW001a, making it impossible to close the game machine frame 012IW003. It's becoming

Therefore, in this modification 1, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine frame 012IW003 from being closed while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the allowable state. Forgetting to do so, that is, closing the game machine frame 012IW003 without restricting the operation of the operation unit can be prevented, and security can be improved.

In the state where the game machine frame 012IW003 is closed, the front end of the short piece 012IW500Ba is arranged between the outer frame 012IW001a and the game machine frame 012IW003, thereby restricting movement in the horizontal direction from the cover position. However, the security cover 012IW500B may be moved in the horizontal direction as long as the setting key 012IW051 is covered by the security cover 012IW500B.

(Modification 2)
Furthermore, as a form in which the security cover is provided on the gaming machine frame 012IW003 side, as shown in FIGS. Between the covering position covering the right side of the substrate case 012IW201 including the setting key 012IW051 and the covering uncovering position rotated from the covering position, centering on the vertical axis 012IW500Cd provided on the back side of the frame 012IW003. may be rotatably pivoted at the In such a case, when the game machine frame 012IW003 is closed, the front end of the short piece 012IW500Ca is locked by the locking portion 012IW500Cc provided on the right side of the outer frame 012IW001a, and the long piece 012IW500Cb pushes the setting key 012IW051 to the rear side. It is only necessary to restrict the rotation from the state in which the cover is covered to the back side.

When the game machine frame 012IW003 is opened, the setting key 012IW051 is uncovered by rotating the security cover 012IW500C around the pivot 012IW500Cd (counterclockwise in plan view) with respect to the board case 012IW201. It should be possible to operate by That is, in the present modification 2, when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed, the security cover 012IW500C (long piece 012IW500Cb) covers the setting key 012IW051 and the rotation is regulated, whereby the pachinko game machine is closed. 1 remains in regulation. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is open, the security cover 012IW500C is rotated around the pivot 012IW500Cd (counterclockwise in plan view) with respect to the board case 012IW201 to release the covering of the setting key 012IW051. By doing so, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be brought into a state in which the restricted state can be released (changed to the permitted state).

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-52(A), the security cover 012IW500C in Modification 2 rotates around the pivot 012IW500Cd (puts the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the allowable state), thereby The setting values of the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed by the store clerk or the like operating the setting key 012IW051. On the other hand, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the allowable state, as shown in FIG. If the 012IW051 is not covered (if the pachinko game machine 1 is not changed to the restricted state), the security cover 012IW500C comes into contact with the front end of the outer frame 012IW001a, making it impossible to close the game machine frame 012IW003. It's becoming

Therefore, in the present modified example 2, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine frame 012IW003 from being closed while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the allowable state. Forgetting to do so, that is, closing the game machine frame 012IW003 without restricting the operation of the operation unit can be prevented, and security can be improved.

(Modification 3)
Further, in the characterizing part 099IW, a form in which the set values of the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed by opening the game machine frame 012IW003 was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the glass door frame By opening 012IW003a, the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1 may be changed. In addition, when the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed by opening the glass door frame 012IW003a in this way, as a modification 3, it is shown in FIGS. 8-53 (A) to 8-53 (C) , a through hole 012IW003b is formed in the lower part of the frame 012IW003 for a game machine, and the setting key 012IW051 can be operated through the through hole 012IW003b. In this case, the mounting surface of the IC and the like on the main substrate 11 is arranged facing the back side of the pachinko game machine 1, and the setting key 012IW051 is arranged on the surface of the main substrate 11 opposite to the mounting surface. .

When the setting key 012IW051 can be operated through the through hole 012IW003b in this way, a door 012IW003c capable of opening and closing the through hole 012IW003b is provided. The operation should be controlled. As shown in FIGS. 8-53(B) and 8-53(C), when the door 012IW003c is provided on the front side of the game machine frame 012IW003, the door 012IW003a is closed by closing the glass door frame 012IW003a. Since the 012IW003c is sandwiched between the glass door frame 012IW003a and the game machine frame 012IW003 so as to be openable and closable, the setting key 012IW051 is strongly prevented from being illegally operated when the glass door frame 012IW003a is closed. and security can be improved.

(Modification 4)
Information that can be recorded as log information is not limited to the information shown in this characteristic portion 099IW, and various log information can be recorded. FIG. 8-54 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the maintenance history screen in Modification 4. As shown in FIG. Modification 4 shows a case where information indicating unsuccessful setting suggestion or "unsuccessful point provision" is recorded as log information and configured to be displayed on the maintenance history screen. The log information 012IW109a of "unsuccessful setting suggestion" is a reason such as the player not performing an operation or the operating means malfunctioning, even though the conditions for executing the setting value suggestion effect suggesting the current setting value have been met. This is log information indicating that a set value suggestion effect was not executed or a set value suggestion effect with low suggestion accuracy was executed. The log information 012IW109b of "unsuccessful in giving points" means that the player did not perform an operation even though the conditions for giving points required for customizing the display screen of the image display device 5 and acquiring image contents were satisfied. This is log information indicating that points were not granted due to reasons such as malfunction of operating means. In this way, it may be configured such that it is possible to provide benefits related to presentation or benefits related to content in some form, and log information thereof is recorded.

(Modification 5)
Information that can be recorded as log information is not limited to the information shown in this characteristic portion 099IW, and various log information can be recorded. FIG. 8-55 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the maintenance history screen in Modification 5. As shown in FIG. In modification 5, the case where the log information 099IW109 indicating that the system reset of the second effect control CPU012IW120b or the like has occurred is configured to be displayable on the maintenance history screen. In the configuration of this characteristic portion 099IW, the log information indicating that the system reset of the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b has occurred is stored only in the second log area, so it is not displayed as history information on the maintenance history screen, but for example , this log information is stored in both the first log area and the second log area, and in addition to the log information recorded in the first log area, the log information recorded in the second log area (for example, log information including the date and time of system reset) is displayed as history information on the maintenance history screen in the maintenance mode.

Further, for example, in a game machine equipped with a sorting device that alternately distributes game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, five ), it may be detected as a startup unit abnormality error and recorded in the log information, and may be displayed on the maintenance history screen. Further, for example, a vibration error indicating that an abnormal vibration has been detected in a game machine or a radio wave error indicating that an abnormal radio wave has been detected may be recorded as log information and displayed on the maintenance history screen. Various forms of log information are often conceivable.

As described above, according to the characteristic portion 099IW, the power supply means (for example, power supply board) and the first control means (for example, mounted on the main board 11) that receives power supply from the power supply means and performs control game control microcomputer 100), and second control means (for example, the second control board 012IW12b mounted on the second effect control board 012IW12b for receiving power supply from the power supply means and performing control based on the instruction information from the first control means) Production control CPU012IW120b) and monitoring means for monitoring the power supplied to the second control means and notifying the second control means (for example, monitoring the power supplied to the second production control board 012IW12b, the power supply voltage When it is less than a predetermined value (for example, +8V), the power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127) for outputting a power off signal to the second effect control CPU 012IW120b), and the second control means, when the control is started, the monitoring means (For example, if a power off signal is input from the power monitoring circuit 099IW127 at the start of control, the start of control waits until the input of the power off signal stops. The second effect control CPU 012IW 120b executes the processing of steps 099IWS001 and 099IWS002.On the other hand, if the power supply disconnection signal is not input from the power monitoring circuit 099IW127 at the start of control, the start of control is awaited. Instead, the log information containing the acquired date and time information as the system reset date and time of the second effect control board 012IW12b is stored in the log area.Second effect control CPU012IW120b executes the processing of steps 099IWS001 and 099IWS003). With such a configuration, optimal processing can be executed depending on the situation.

In addition, according to this characteristic portion 099IW, power supply means (for example, power supply board) and first control means (for example, for game control mounted on the main board 11) that receives power supply from the power supply means and performs the first control microcomputer 100), a second control means (for example, the second effect control CPU012IW120b mounted on the second effect control board 012IW12b) that receives power supply from the power supply means and performs the second control, and the second control means Monitoring means for monitoring the supplied power and notifying the second control means (for example, monitoring the power supplied to the second effect control board 012IW12b, and when the power supply voltage is less than a predetermined value (for example, +8V) , A power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127) that outputs a power-off signal to the second effect control CPU 012IW120b, and the first control means provides instruction information ( For example, a command at power-on such as a setting change command, a setting confirmation command, an initialization command, etc.) is notified to the second control means, and the second control means, at the start of control, sets the power supply voltage of the supplied power to a predetermined level. When the monitoring means notifies that the value has changed from less than the value to the predetermined value or more, it specifies that at least the first control means and the second control means have restarted, and based on the instruction information from the first control means Start the second control (for example, if a power-off signal is input from the power monitoring circuit 099IW127 at the start of control, after waiting for the start of control until the input of the power-off signal stops, a setting change command or , setting confirmation command, initialization designation command, etc. The process is executed based on the command at the time of power-on.Second effect control CPU 012IW 120b executes the processing of steps 099IWS001, 099IWS002, 099IWS204, 012IWS802, 012IWS805, 012IWS809, etc. ), at the start of control, when the monitoring means notifies that the power supply voltage of the supplied power supply is equal to or higher than a predetermined value, it is specified that only the second control means has been restarted, and the second control is started ( For example, when the power-off signal is not input from the power monitoring circuit 099IW127 at the start of control, log information including the acquired date and time information as the system reset date and time of the second effect control board 012IW12b without waiting for the start of control is stored in the log area. the part that executes the processing). With such a configuration, optimal processing can be executed depending on the situation.

In addition, according to the present characteristic portion 099IW, power supply means (for example, power supply board) and first control means for receiving power supply from the power supply means for control (for example, game control microcomputer mounted on main board 11 100) and a second control means (for example, the second effect control CPU012IW120b mounted on the second effect control board 012IW12b) that receives power supply from the power supply means and performs control based on the instruction information from the first control means. , monitoring means for monitoring the power supplied to the second control means and notifying the second control means (for example, monitoring the power supplied to the second effect control board 012IW12b, and confirming that the power supply voltage is a predetermined value (for example, +8V), for the second effect control CPU012IW120b, and a power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127) that outputs a power supply disconnection signal, the second control means, in response to notification from the monitoring means at the start of control It has an output means for outputting information that can specify the activation history of the second control means (for example, when it is determined that the system reset of the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b has occurred, and when the power failure of the game machine itself has occurred By displaying a different initial image at different times, the activation history can be recognized.In addition, log information 099IW109 indicating that the system reset of the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b has occurred can be displayed on the maintenance history screen. (See FIG. 8-55).In addition, for the log information recorded in the second log area, the inspection device is connected to the pachinko game machine 1, and the inspection device and the second effect control board 012IW12b is read out by inputting/outputting an inspection signal to/from the CPU 012IW 120b). With such a configuration, it is possible to check the status when the power is turned on, and to execute optimum processing according to the status.

The above-mentioned "first control means" and "second control means" refer to the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 and the second effect control CPU 012IW120b mounted on the second effect control board 012IW12b. Not limited to the combination, the second effect control CPU012IW120b mounted on the second effect control board 012IW12b and the first effect control CPU012IW120a mounted on the first effect control board 012IW12a This feature part 099IW configuration is applicable. In this case, the power supplied to the first effect control board 012IW12a is monitored, and when the power supply voltage is less than a predetermined value (for example, +8V), a power disconnection signal is output to the first effect control board 012IW12a. It is sufficient if a power supply monitoring circuit is provided. With such a configuration, the process can be started after the power is stably supplied in the first effect control board 012IW12a, and the occurrence of system reset can be specified in the first effect control board 012IW12a when the power is turned on. , the optimum process can be executed according to the situation.

In this characteristic part 099IW, as shown in FIG. 8-2, instead of the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. The configuration of this characteristic portion 099IW can also be applied to a game machine in which the main board 11 and the effect control board 12 shown in . In this case, there is a power supply monitoring circuit that monitors the power supplied to the effect control board 12 and outputs a power off signal to the effect control board 12 when the power supply voltage is less than a predetermined value (eg, +8V). It is sufficient if it is provided. With such a configuration, the process can be started after the power is stably supplied in the first effect control board 12, and the occurrence of system reset can be specified in the effect control board 12 when the power is turned on. Optimal processing can be executed according to the

Further, according to the characteristic part 099IW, the second control means continues until the monitoring means notifies that the power supply voltage of the supplied power supply is equal to or higher than a predetermined value (for example, +8 V) (for example, the power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127 until the input of the power off signal is stopped), control is not started (for example, the part where the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b executes the processing of steps 099IWS001 and 099IWS002). With such a configuration, optimal processing can be executed depending on the situation.

In addition, according to the characteristic part 099IW, the storage means (for example, the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14) capable of holding the stored contents even if the power supply to the game machine is stopped is provided, and the second control means When the monitoring means notifies that the power supply voltage of the supplied power supply has changed from less than the predetermined value to the predetermined value or more at the start of control (for example, when the power supply disconnection signal is received from the power monitoring circuit 099IW127 at the start of control input and then the input of the power-off signal is stopped), predetermined information (for example, power-on date and time, setting change start date and time, setting check start date and time) based on instruction information from the first control means , RAM clear date and time, etc.) are stored in the storage means (for example, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b, step 099IWS 205, step 012IWS 802, step 012IWS 805, step 012IWS 809 etc.), and supplied at the start of control When it is notified from the monitoring means that the power supply voltage of the power supply to be connected is equal to or higher than a predetermined value, the predetermined image is displayed on the display means, and the predetermined information is not stored in the storage means (for example, the system of the second effect control board 012IW12b When a reset or the like occurs, the initial image is displayed on the image display device 5, but the processing of step 099 IWS 204 is not executed, and commands at power-on such as a setting change command, a setting confirmation command, and an initialization designation command are executed. do not store log information about them). With such a configuration, optimum processing can be executed depending on the situation.

Further, according to the present characteristic portion 099IW, the storage means includes first storage means (eg, first log area for recording log information for game parlors) and second storage means (eg, log information for game machine makers). When the second control means is notified by the monitoring means that the power supply voltage of the supplied power supply has changed from less than the predetermined value to the predetermined value or more at the start of control stores predetermined information about activation in the first storage means based on the instruction information from the first control means (for example, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b performs step 099IWS204, step 012IWS802, step 012IWS805, step 012IWS809, etc. process execution part), and when the monitoring means notifies that the power supply voltage of the supplied power supply is equal to or higher than a predetermined value at the start of control, it is possible to specify that only the second control means has been restarted. Information (for example, log information including system reset date and time) is stored in the second storage means (for example, second effect control CPU 012IW 120b executes N of step 099IWS001 and step 099IWS003). With such a configuration, optimal processing can be executed depending on the situation.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 099IW, the second control means includes a first backup process (for example, a backup process of storing log information in the first log area) for storing information related to control in the first storage means, and a control A second backup process (for example, a backup process of storing log information in a second log area) for storing information related to the second storage means, and the first backup process stores one piece of information in one storage unit. A second backup process stores one piece of information in a plurality of storage areas (see, eg, FIG. 8-19). With such a configuration, optimum processing can be executed depending on the situation.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 099IW, it is possible to set one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value "1" to setting value "3") having different advantages for the player. In addition, a storage area (for example, RAM 102) capable of storing information generated during a game is provided, and abnormal history information (for example, log information) related to the game can be displayed in a identifiable manner, and the storage contents of the storage area can be displayed. Initialization processing for initialization (for example, RAM clear 1) can be executed, and when initialization processing is executed, setting change processing for changing setting values (for example, setting change processing) is executed It is possible. In addition, when the initialization process is executed and the setting change process is not executed, the fact that the initialization process has been executed can be identifiably displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-46 (E) , display the log information of RAM clearing), and when the initialization process and the setting change process are executed, the setting change process is executed without displaying the indication that the initialization process has been executed. (For example, as shown in FIG. 8-45(D), only log information indicating the end of setting change is displayed). Therefore, since unnecessary information is not displayed, it is possible to prevent history information from becoming difficult to check. That is, in this example, when the setting change process is executed, it is assumed that the initialization process is executed. is self-explanatory, it is redundant to record and display the log information of the initialization processing. Therefore, by not recording or displaying unnecessary log information of initialization processing, unnecessary recording of log information is prevented, and on the contrary, it is prevented that history information becomes difficult to check.

In addition, according to the characteristic part 099IW, it is possible to execute setting confirmation processing (for example, setting confirmation processing) for confirming the setting value, and when the action of the player is detected during execution of the setting confirmation processing, (For example, as shown in FIGS. 8-45 to 8-48, based on the fact that the push button 31B is pressed while the setting confirmation display is being displayed, maintenance mode menu screen is displayed). Therefore, it is possible to suitably check the history information.

In addition, according to this characteristic portion 099IW, the game control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)) for controlling the game, and the control of the effect based on the information from the game control means Effect control means (for example, second effect control CPU012IW120b) and. In addition, the game control means can output initialization information (for example, initialization designation command) indicating that the initialization process has been executed, and setting change information (for example, , setting change commands) can be output. In addition, the production control means can specify and display different history information depending on whether the initialization information and the setting change information are output (for example, the second production control CPU 012IW 120b can display the initialization designation command and based on the reception of the setting change command, record the log information of the end of the setting change, and display it on the maintenance history screen as shown in FIG. 8-45(D)). Therefore, it is possible to suitably check the history information.

In addition, according to this characteristic part 099IW, it is possible to detect a predetermined abnormality (for example, left-handed notification state), and history storage means capable of storing history information (for example, backup data memory 099IW210A to 210D of backup memory board 099IW14 and a log area of RAM012IW122b). In addition, a first abnormal state (for example, a first left-handed notification state) indicating that a predetermined abnormality has a predetermined importance, and a second indicating that the predetermined abnormality has a higher degree of importance than the first abnormal state 2 abnormal state (for example, second left-handed notification state) can be detected, information indicating that the first abnormal state has been detected is not stored as history information, and information indicating that the second abnormal state has been detected can be stored as history information (for example, log information is recorded only when the second left-handed notification state occurs). Therefore, history information can be preferably stored.

In addition, according to the characteristic portion 099IW, a first abnormality (eg, first left-handed alert state) and a second abnormality having a higher degree of importance than the first abnormality (eg, second left-handed alert state) detectable. In addition, a history storage means (for example, a log area provided in the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14 and a log area of the RAM 012IW122b) capable of storing history information of abnormalities related to the game is provided, and the history storage means stores history information can be identifiably displayed (eg, displaying a maintenance history screen, as shown in FIGS. 8-45 and 8-46). Further, when the second abnormality is detected, information indicating that the second abnormality has been detected is stored as history information, and when the first abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means, the first abnormality is detected. Information indicating that the vehicle has been driven is not stored as history information (for example, log information is recorded only when the second left-handed notification state occurs, and log information is not recorded even if the first left-handed notification state occurs). Therefore, history information can be preferably stored and displayed. That is, since there is a limit to the storage capacity of log information, if it is recorded as log information before the first anomaly, which has a low degree of importance, there is a possibility that the history of necessary anomalies will disappear early. Then, since only the second or higher items with high importance are recorded, the history information can be preferably stored and displayed.

In addition, according to the characteristic portion 099IW, the second abnormality is detected according to the detection result of the first abnormality per unit period (for example, based on the fact that the execution condition of the first left-handed notification for two is satisfied , the execution condition for the second left-handed notification is established). Therefore, history information can be preferably stored and displayed.

In this example, a case is shown in which the execution condition for the second hitting-to-left notification is satisfied according to the number of times the execution condition for the first hitting-to-left notification is satisfied, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, based on the fact that the execution condition for the first left-handed notification continues for a predetermined period, it is determined that the execution condition for the second left-handed notification is satisfied, and the second left-handed notification is executed. good too.

In addition, according to this characteristic portion 099IW, it is possible to notify that the first abnormality is detected and that the second abnormality is detected (for example, execute the first left-handed notification and the second left-handed notification ). In this case, it is possible to notify that the first abnormality has been detected in a predetermined manner, and it is possible to notify that the second abnormality has been detected in a manner different from the predetermined manner (for example, in the first left-handed notification Only the left-handed information display is displayed, and in the second left-handed information, in addition to the display of the left-handed information display, all the game effect lamps 9 are lit and the information sound is output). Therefore, it is possible to appropriately notify the abnormality.

In addition, according to this characteristic portion 099IW, it is possible to detect a plurality of types of first abnormality and second abnormality (for example, in addition to the first left-handed notification state and the second left-handed notification state, the first full tank notification state and second full notification state). In addition, the first abnormality and the second abnormality are detected by different detection conditions for each type of the first abnormality and the second abnormality (for example, the first left-handed notification state and the second left-handed notification state are sent to the passage gate 012IW041. is determined by detecting the passage of the game ball 5 times or 10 times. seconds or 30 seconds). Therefore, history information can be preferably stored and displayed.

In addition, in this example, a case is shown in which the full-tank notification is executed in addition to the left-handed notification, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, it is configured to execute abnormal winning notification, magnet error notification, ball clogging error notification, etc., and there are a first notification with low importance and a second notification with high importance. The log information may be recorded only when it is executed and displayed on the maintenance history screen.

Further, according to the present characteristic portion 099IW, predetermined control means (for example, game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) and specific control means for performing control based on information from the predetermined control means (for example, Second production control CPU 012IW 120b).In addition, the specific control means can temporarily store the date and time when the power supply to the specific control means is stopped (for example, the date and time information is stored in the temporary area of the RAM 012IW 122b every 100 ms. ), and when the power supply to the specific control means is started, the information output by the predetermined control means that can specify that the power supply has started (for example, the initialization designation command, the command at the time of restoration) Based on the input, the temporarily stored date and time can be stored as the date and time of power failure (for example, the log information is stored in the log area as the date and time of power failure). That is, even when power failure of the game machine itself occurs, and when system reset of the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b occurs, both are recorded as power failure date and time, and power failure date and time are recorded. It can be conveniently stored.

Further, according to the characteristic part 099IW, when the power supply to the specific control means is started, if the information that can specify the start of the power supply cannot be input, the temporarily stored date and time is used as the power failure date and time. Not stored (for example, log information is not stored in the log area as the date and time of power failure when an initialization designation command or recovery command is not received). Therefore, the date and time of power failure can be preferably stored.

Further, according to the characteristic part 099IW, it is possible to temporarily store the date and time every predetermined timing (for example, 100 ms) (for example, the date and time information is stored in the temporary area of the RAM 012IW 122b). Therefore, the date and time of power failure can be preferably stored.

Although this example shows the case where the date and time information is temporarily stored every 100 ms, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, only when the stop of the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b is detected, the current date and time information may be temporarily stored and stored as temporary power failure date and time.

Further, according to the characteristic part 099IW, the temporary storage of the date and time at each predetermined timing is stopped based on the power supply to the specific control means being stopped (for example, the temporary storage enable flag is reset, and the date and time are stored every 100 ms). Temporary storage of information is not executed). Then, based on the input of predetermined information output by the predetermined control means (for example, an initialization designation command, a command for recovery, or other commands), the temporary storage of the date and time is resumed at predetermined timings (for example, , the temporary storage enable flag is set, and the temporary storage of the date and time information every 100 ms is resumed). Therefore, the date and time of power failure can be preferably stored.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 099IW, the specific control means can store the date and time when power supply to the specific control means is started (for example, the power-on date and time is recorded as log information). Also, if the date and time when the power supply started is not stored, the temporarily stored date and time will not be stored as the date and time of the power failure (for example, if the log information of the power-on date and time prior to the power failure is not recorded) does not record the date and time of the power outage). Therefore, it is possible to prevent an abnormal storage state. In other words, since there is no record of power-on of the gaming machine, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an abnormal state in which the date and time of power failure are recorded.

Further, according to the present characteristic portion 099IW, the first control means (for example, the first effect control CPU012IW120a), and the second control means (for example, the second effect control for performing control based on the information from the first control means (CPU 012IW 120b) for Further, the first control means sequentially outputs a plurality of pieces of information relating to the change of date and time to the second control means over a predetermined period of time (e.g., hour signal, minute signal, , second signal, year signal, month signal, day signal, and day signal in sequence). In addition, the second control means stores the date and time change history after a specific period of time, which is equal to or longer than a predetermined period, has elapsed since part of the information regarding the date and time change was input (for example, FIG. 8- As shown in 40, after 500 ms has passed since the hour signal was received, the time is recorded in the log information as the set date and time). Therefore, the date and time change history can be preferably stored.

In addition, according to the characteristic part 099IW, the second control means changes the internal date and time information every time information on changing the date and time is input (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-40, the received immediately set the information of the real-time clock 012IW 126 based on the hour signal, minute signal, second signal, year signal, month signal, date signal, or day signal). Therefore, the date and time change history can be preferably stored.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 099IW, when the information regarding the change of the date and time is input a plurality of times before the specific period elapses, the second control means changes the date and time based on the last input information regarding the change of the date and time. Store change history (e.g., if additional hour, minute, second, year, month, day, or day of the week signals are received before 500 ms elapses, the last received signal will be Based on the set date and time information of the real-time clock 012IW126, the log information of the set date and time is recorded). Therefore, the date and time change history can be preferably stored.

In addition, according to this characteristic part 099IW, the second control means can display the date and time change history (for example, as shown in FIG. display log information indicating that the In addition, according to the changed date and time, the date and time change history is stored and displayed (for example, the date and time information is read from the set real-time clock 012IW 126 and the log information is recorded as the time setting date and time). Therefore, the date and time change history can be preferably stored.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 099IW, the second control means stores the history information in accordance with the order in which the game-related abnormality occurred, regardless of the date and time change (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-46 (E) , even if the date and time become inconsistent before and after setting the current time, the log information is recorded in the log area in the order in which it was generated, and the log information is displayed in the order in which it was generated). Therefore, it is possible to preferably store abnormality history information.

Further, according to the characteristic part 099IW, it is possible to give a profit to the player based on the establishment of a specific condition (for example, the game ball winning in the V winning area in the second special variable winning device 012IW007b). (For example, after the end of the jackpot game, control to the variable probability state). Moreover, the specific condition can be established based on at least the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the occurrence of a variable probability big hit). Then, when the specific condition is not satisfied even though the predetermined condition is satisfied, it is possible to store specific information (for example, log information of the date and time when the probability variation is not satisfied) that can specify that the specific condition is not satisfied. . Therefore, information can be preferably stored. That is, troubles other than errors can also be recorded, and information can be preferably stored.

In addition, according to this characteristic part 099IW, it is possible to give benefits related to production or benefits related to content (for example, as shown in FIG. ” record the log information 012IW109b). Therefore, information can be preferably stored.

In this example, regarding profit, when the V prize is not established and the probability variation is not established, when the setting suggestion is unsuccessful, or when the point award is unsuccessful, log information is recorded and displayed on the maintenance history screen. was shown, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, in a gaming machine configured to perform a role game that shifts to a jackpot game based on a game ball winning a specific area (V winning area) within the role, the game ball wins the V winning area. If there is no log information, the log information may be recorded and displayed on the maintenance history screen. Further, for example, it may be configured to record log information and display it on the maintenance history screen when a setting value suggestion effect is executed but a low setting value is suggested. Further, for example, when an image with a low frequency of appearance is expected to be displayed or a sound is not displayed or output in a scene, log information may be recorded and displayed on the maintenance history screen. Further, for example, in the case of application to a slot machine, log information may be recorded and displayed on the maintenance history screen when the pressing order is incorrect while the pressing order navigation is being executed. As such, various aspects of "benefits" are conceivable.

In addition, according to this characteristic portion 099IW, it is possible to display specific information in a recognizable manner (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-54, the maintenance history screen displays log information 012IW109a of "unsuccessful setting suggestion" and log information 012IW109b of "unsuccessful point provision"). Therefore, information can be preferably displayed.

In this example, a case was shown in which the date and time when the probability variation was not established, the setting suggestion failure, and the log information of the point grant failure were displayed on the maintenance history screen, but the maintenance history screen may be configured not to display them. Also, these log information may be stored in the second log area for recording the log information for the game machine maker, instead of the first log area for recording the log information for the game arcade. Then, the game machine maker may confirm what kind of trouble has occurred and utilize it for the development of the game machine.

In addition, according to the characteristic portion 099IW, it is possible to output information including specific information as a two-dimensional code (for example, to generate and display a two-dimensional code including log information of probability variation failure date and time). Therefore, information can be preferably output.

In this example, log information is recorded in association with date and time information including both date and time, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, log information may be recorded in association with date information containing only year, month and day, or log information may be recorded in association with time information containing only hour, minute and second. good too. Various aspects are conceivable as a method of recording log information. Similarly, in this characteristic portion 099IW, "date and time" does not necessarily include both date information and time information. It is a concept that also includes cases.

In addition, the characteristic portion 099IW includes a second invention described below. That is, conventionally, there is a pachinko game machine that can be set to one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for a player, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. . Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 describes that setting change processing is executed when the power switch is turned on while the front frame is opened and the setting key switch is turned on. . Further, it is described that the RAM area other than the setting value storage means is cleared in the setting change process. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, in a gaming machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of set values with different advantages for the player, Processing may not be possible. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a game machine of means 1 of the second invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of set values (for example, set value "1" to set value "3") with different degrees of advantage for a player,
Operation means (e.g., clear switch) provided to enable execution of initialization processing (e.g., RAM clear 1 processing, RAM clear 2 processing) based on an operation performed when power supply to the gaming machine is started. When,
specific information storage means (for example, RAM012IW122b) capable of storing specific information (for example, a RAM clear flag) indicating that the operation means has been operated when power supply to the gaming machine is started;
When executing a plurality of processes including a set value change process for changing the set value, the process execution means for executing the process using the specific information multiple times (for example, step 012IWS025 in the game control microcomputer 100, (a portion for executing S034 and S048), and according to this feature, any one of a plurality of set values having different degrees of advantage for the player can be set. Processing can be preferably performed in a game machine configured to be settable. In particular, in the process of changing the setting value, which takes a certain amount of processing time, storing specific information (in this example, the RAM clear flag) and confirming the RAM clear flag before executing the process, the process can be performed in a suitable manner. It can be performed.

In this example, as the processing to be executed "using the specific information multiple times", a setting confirmation command or a setting change command is transmitted at steps 012IWS026 and S207 according to whether or not the RAM clear flag is set at step 012IWS025. and whether or not to change the set values in steps 012IWS035 to S042 according to whether the RAM clear flag is set in step 012IWS034, and whether or not to perform RAM clearing in step 012IWS048. Although the case where the recovery processing of steps 012 IWS049 and S051 or the RAM clear 1 processing is executed depending on whether the flag is set has been shown, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, depending on whether or not specific information (RAM clear flag) is set, it may be controlled whether or not to validate the operation switch immediately before the operation to change the set value.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the second invention,
The process execution means changes the set value based on the operation of the operation means in the set value change process (for example, the part that executes steps 012IWS039 to S042 in the game control microcomputer 100)
According to such a configuration, since the operation means can be used in common, an increase in cost can be suppressed. That is, in this example, since the clear switch can be used as both the operation means for initializing the RAM 102 and the operation means for changing the set values, an increase in cost can be suppressed. can.

In this example, by using the clear switch as a dual purpose, it is necessary to check the state of the clear switch multiple times when turning on the power to the game machine. When it is detected, the RAM clear flag is set, and thereafter, whether or not the clear switch for initializing the RAM 102 is operated is checked to see if the RAM clear flag is set or not. By confirming the state of the clear switch itself, the operation of the clear switch for the change operation can be suitably processed.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the second invention,
When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, normal initialization processing (for example, RAM clear 1 processing) is executed based on the operation of the operating means, while the power supply to the gaming machine is started. Initialization processing executing means (for example, step 012IWS015, S051 in the game control microcomputer 100) for executing initialization processing (for example, RAM clear 2 processing) at the time of abnormality based on the detection of the abnormality )When,
A first storage area (for example, a clear storage area 1 of the RAM 102) whose storage contents are cleared in the normal initialization process;
A second storage area (for example, a clear storage area 2 of the RAM 102) in which storage contents are cleared in the initialization process at the time of abnormality,
The specific information storage means can store the specific information in the second storage area (for example, the RAM clear flag is set in the clear storage area 2 of the RAM 102).
According to such a configuration, in a gaming machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for a player, can be processed.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the second invention,
Based on the state of the operation means is switched from the OFF state to the ON state, determination means that can determine that the operation means has been operated (for example, step 012IWS041 in the game control microcomputer 100 is provided),
The process executing means can change the setting value based on the fact that the operation means is operated by the determining means in the setting value change process (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 can change the setting value at step 012IWS041 If Y, execute step 012IWS042),
The determination means determines whether or not the operation means is operated by setting the state of the operation means for the first time when power supply to the game machine is started to the ON state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 012IWS037 when N in step 012IWS036)
According to such a configuration, in a gaming machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for a player, can be processed.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 5 of the second invention,
Timer interrupt processing execution means capable of executing timer interrupt processing each time a predetermined timer interrupt occurs (for example, a portion that executes steps S21 to S27 in the game control microcomputer 100),
The process executing means executes the process using the specific information a plurality of times until the timer interrupt process is executed after power supply to the game machine is started (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 Step 012IWS025, S034, S048 are executed)
According to such a configuration, in a gaming machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for a player, can be processed.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 6 of the second invention,
Information output means (for example, step 012IWS047, S178 in game control microcomputer 100) that can output setting value information (for example, setting value command) that can specify which setting value is set prepared,
Suggestion production execution means,
Based on the set value information input from the information output means, it is possible to execute a suggestive effect (for example, a pre-game suggestive effect, a game-in-progress suggestive effect, a jackpot mid-suggestive effect) (for example, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b Steps 012 in IWS509 to S515, S704 to S709, S901 to S906),
The suggestion effect execution means is
As the suggestive effect, a first suggestive effect (for example, a pre-game suggestive effect and a suggestive effect during the game according to the third effect mode, a suggestive effect during the jackpot according to the fourth effect mode) and a second suggestive effect (for example, a game according to the first effect mode) It is possible to execute a previous suggesting effect, a suggesting effect during a game, a suggesting effect during a big hit, and
When the set value information is not input normally, the first suggestive effect is not executed as the suggestive effect, and the second suggestive effect can be executed as the suggestive effect (for example, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b (By executing steps 012 IWS514, S709, S906, the pre-game suggestive effect and during-game suggestive effect by the third effect mode, and the jackpot mid-suggestive effect by the fourth effect mode are not executed)
According to such a configuration, in a gaming machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for a player, A decrease in interest can be prevented.

In addition, the characteristic portion 099IW includes a third invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko game machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of set values with different advantages for the player, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-60546, for example. . Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-60546 describes that when the RAM clear switch is operated and the setting key switch is in the ON state, the initial setting 2 is executed and the lottery probability is changed. In addition, it is described that the setting key switch is used to activate the setting switch, and the winning lottery probability of the special figure corresponding to the setting 1 to 3 indicated by the setting switch is set. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-60546, in a gaming machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of set values with different advantages for the player, Processing may not be possible. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a game machine of means 1 of the third invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of set values (for example, set value "1" to set value "3") with different degrees of advantage for a player,
an operating means (e.g., a clear switch);
Based on the operation of the operation means when the power supply to the game machine is started, processing execution means (for example, game control microcomputer 100 (the part that executes steps 012IWS039 to S042);
Based on the fact that the state of the operation means is switched from the OFF state to the ON state, the determination means that can determine that the operation means has been operated (for example, the part that executes step 012IWS041 in the game control microcomputer 100) prepared,
The processing execution means can change the set value based on the determination that the operation means has been operated by the determination means in the set value change process (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 is step If Y in 012IWS041, execute step 012IWS042),
The determination means determines whether or not the operation means is operated by turning on the state of the operation means for the first time when the set value change process is started (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 , if N in step 012IWS036, execute step 012IWS037)
According to this feature, the game machine can be set to any one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player. It can be performed. That is, it is possible to prevent the setting value from being unintentionally changed even though the operation means (in this example, the clear switch) is continuously pressed, and the process can be preferably performed. It can be carried out.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the third invention,
Specific information storage means (for example, RAM012IW122b) capable of storing specific information (for example, RAM clear flag) indicating that the operation means is operated when power supply to the gaming machine is started;
When executing a plurality of processes including a set value change process, the process execution means executes the process using the specific information a plurality of times (for example, step 012 IWS025, S034, S048 in the game control microcomputer 100 part)
According to such a configuration, in a gaming machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for a player, can be processed.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the third invention,
When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, normal initialization processing (for example, RAM clear 1 processing) is executed based on the operation of the operating means, while the power supply to the gaming machine is started. Initialization processing executing means (for example, step 012IWS015, S051 in the game control microcomputer 100) for executing initialization processing (for example, RAM clear 2 processing) at the time of abnormality based on the detection of the abnormality )When,
A first storage area (for example, a clear storage area 1 of the RAM 102) whose storage contents are cleared in the normal initialization process;
A second storage area (for example, a clear storage area 2 of the RAM 102) in which storage contents are cleared in the initialization process at the time of abnormality,
The specific information storage means can store the specific information in the second storage area (for example, the RAM clear flag is set in the clear storage area 2 of the RAM 102).
According to such a configuration, in a gaming machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for a player, can be processed.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the third invention,
a first state storage means (for example, a previous clear switch buffer) for storing the state of the previous operation means;
A second state storage means (for example, clear switch buffer) for storing the current state of the operation means,
The determining means can determine that the operating means has been operated based on the fact that the stored contents of the first state storing means are in the OFF state and the stored contents of the second state storing means are in the ON state ( For example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 012IWS041),
The first state storage means stores the ON state as the state of the operation means for the first time when the set value change process is started (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 012IWS037).
According to such a configuration, in a gaming machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for a player, can be processed.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 5 of the third invention,
Information output means (for example, step 012IWS047, S178 in game control microcomputer 100) that can output setting value information (for example, setting value command) that can specify which setting value is set prepared,
Suggestion production execution means,
Based on the set value information input from the information output means, it is possible to execute a suggestive effect (for example, a pre-game suggestive effect, a game-in-progress suggestive effect, a jackpot mid-suggestive effect) (for example, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b Steps 012 in IWS509 to S515, S704 to S709, S901 to S906),
The suggestion effect execution means is
As the suggestive effect, a first suggestive effect (for example, a pre-game suggestive effect and a suggestive effect during the game according to the third effect mode, a suggestive effect during the jackpot according to the fourth effect mode) and a second suggestive effect (for example, a game according to the first effect mode) It is possible to execute a previous suggesting effect, a suggesting effect during the game, a suggesting effect during the jackpot),
When the set value information is not input normally, the first suggestive effect is not executed as the suggestive effect, and the second suggestive effect can be executed as the suggestive effect (for example, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b (By executing steps 012 IWS514, S709, S906, the pre-game suggestive effect and during-game suggestive effect by the third effect mode, and the jackpot mid-suggestive effect by the fourth effect mode are not executed)
According to such a configuration, in a gaming machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for a player, A decline in interest can be prevented.

In addition, the characteristic portion 099IW includes a fourth invention shown below. In other words, conventionally, a pachinko machine configured to be able to set one of a plurality of set values based on a setting operation, and to be able to control an advantageous state based on the set set value. As a game machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902. In JP-A-2010-200902, a change stop command (set value designation command) corresponding to the setting value before and after the change is sent from the main control board to the production control board, and the setting before and after the change obtained by the change stop command It is described that, based on the values, three types of presentation patterns corresponding to three types of characters, giraffe, elephant, and lion, are displayed. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a possibility that an erroneous suggestion effect may be executed when the setting value information (setting value specifying command) is not normal. In a game machine that is configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on the set values, there is a risk that interest in the game may rather be reduced. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a game machine of means 1 of the fourth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
Setting means that can be set to one of the setting values of multiple stages based on the setting operation (for example, the setting value "1" to the setting value "3") (for example, the step in the game control microcomputer 100 012IWS042) and
Game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, a portion that executes steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100),
Information output means (for example, step 012IWS047, S178 in game control microcomputer 100) that can output setting value information (for example, setting value command) that can specify which setting value is set and ,
Based on the set value information output from the information output means, a suggestive effect execution means (for example, a second effect) capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, a suggestive effect before a game, a suggestive effect during a game, a suggestive effect during a big hit) a part for executing steps 012IWS509 to S515, S704 to S709, and S901 to S906 in the control CPU 012IW120b;
When the set value information output from the information output means is not normal, the suggestive effect executing means sets a predetermined set value that is less advantageous for the player among the set values of the plurality of stages. As a thing, it is possible to execute the suggested effect (for example, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b is a part that executes steps 012IWS 512, S707, and S904)
According to this feature, in a gaming machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set value, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game. be able to.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the fourth invention,
The information output means can output the set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 012IWS047 and S178 to transmit the set value command when the power is turned on and when the variation starts. do)
According to such a configuration, even if the setting value information cannot be input normally at a certain timing, the setting value information can be input normally at the next timing. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the fourth invention,
The suggestive effect execution means performs, as the suggestive effect, a first suggestive effect with a high degree of specificity of the set value (for example, a pre-game suggestive effect and a suggestive effect during the game according to the third effect mode, and a jackpot during the fourth effect mode). Suggestion performance) and a second suggestion performance with a low degree of specificity of the set value (for example, a pre-game suggestion performance by the first performance mode, a game suggestion performance, and a big hit suggestion performance) can be executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the fourth invention,
Using a plurality of types of determination data (for example, a pre-game suggestive effect determination table, a during-game suggestive effect determination table, a jackpot during a suggestive effect determination table) for determining the suggestive effect execution mode, the suggestive effect execution mode is determined. Suggestion effect determination means to be determined (for example, a part that executes steps 012IWS510, S512, S514, S705, S707, S709, S902, S904, and S906 in the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b),
The suggestive effect determining means includes:
Using the decision data according to the setting value that is set among the plurality of types of decision data, determine the execution mode of the suggestion effect Step 012 IWS510, S705 and S902 are executed based on the stored set values),
If the setting value information is not input normally, the determination data corresponding to the predetermined setting value (for example, the setting value “1”) is used to determine the execution mode of the suggestive effect (for example, the second effect control The CPU 012IW 120b executes steps 012IWS512, S707, and S904 based on the set value "1")
According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent an increase in data capacity.

In the characteristic part 099IW, "determining the execution mode of the suggestive effect" is a concept that includes determining whether or not to execute the suggestive effect and also determining the effect mode of the suggestive effect. be.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 5 of the fourth invention,
The suggestive effect executing means performs a suggestive effect (for example, a pre-game suggestive effect or According to such a configuration, it is possible to make players interested in the state of the gaming machine before the start of the game, and to start the game from an early time zone. It is possible to give motivation to play, and to increase amusement in the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 6 of the fourth invention,
The suggestive effect execution means is set at least during the game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (from setting change to execution of variable display 30 times)) elapses after the setting value is changed. Suggestive effects can be executed at different ratios according to the set values (for example, see FIGS. 8-9 (A), (B), FIGS. 8-29 (A), (B))
According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player with a motivation to play a game for a predetermined period of time, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 7 of the fourth invention,
The suggestive effect execution means can execute the suggestive effect at different ratios according to the set value (for example, see FIGS. 8-29 (A), (B), etc.),
It is described that an informing means (for example, a part in which the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b executes step S012IWS516) capable of informing information about the executed suggestive effect may be further provided, and such a configuration is described. According to this, it is possible to confirm the suggestive effect executed in the past, and to increase the interest in the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 8 of the fourth invention,
The suggestive effect execution means can execute the suggestive effect at different ratios according to the set value (for example, see FIGS. 8-31 (A), (B), etc.),
Predetermined effects in which the suggestive effect is difficult to recognize when executed in parallel with the suggestive effect (for example, character effects in which the big win suggestive effect is difficult to recognize when executed in parallel with the big win suggestive effect) a predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a light guide plate effect, an error display, etc.;
Limiting means for limiting the execution of the predetermined effect when the suggestive effect is executed (for example, when the suggestive effect during the jackpot is executed, the execution of the character product effect is limited. See FIG. 8-31 (D)) According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 9 of the fourth invention,
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at a different rate according to the set value (for example, see FIGS. 8-31 (A), (B), etc.),
Predetermined notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification in a manner in which the setting suggestion is difficult to recognize when executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, when executed in parallel with the big win suggestion performance, the big win suggestion performance is recognized. It is also described that additional effects such as character effects, light guide plate effects, error displays, etc., that make the game difficult to play may be provided.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 10 of the fourth invention,
A predetermined control period in an advantageous state (for example, a fanfare period, an interval period, an ending period, etc. during a jackpot game) differs depending on the set value (for example, see FIG. 8-8).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 11 of the fourth invention,
A predetermined control period (for example, variable time) for variable display differs depending on the set value (for example, see FIGS. 8-10)
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 12 of the fourth invention,
Equipped with an opening/closing body that can be opened and closed, and a regulation member (for example, security cover 012IW500A/security cover 012IW500B/security cover 012IW500C) capable of regulating the operation of the operation unit,
When the opening/closing body is closed, the regulating member maintains the regulated state in which the operation of the operating portion is regulated, and when the opening/closing body is opened, the regulated state can be released (for example, when the game machine frame 012IW003 is closed). In the state where the security cover 012IW500A is closed, the security cover 012IW500A maintains a restricted state in which operations on the operation unit including the setting key 012IW051 are restricted. is released, and the operation of the setting key 012IW051 is permitted (Figs. 8-5, 8-6, 8-49 to 8-52).
It is described that it may be so, and according to such a configuration, security is improved.

In addition, the characteristic portion 099IW also includes a fifth invention described below. In other words, conventionally, a pachinko machine configured to be able to set one of a plurality of set values based on a setting operation, and to be able to control an advantageous state based on the set set value. As a game machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902. In JP-A-2010-200902, a change stop command (set value designation command) corresponding to the setting value before and after the change is sent from the main control board to the production control board, and the setting before and after the change obtained by the change stop command It is described that, based on the values, three types of presentation patterns corresponding to three types of characters, giraffe, elephant, and lion, are displayed. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a possibility that an erroneous suggestion effect may be executed when the setting value information (setting value specifying command) is not normal. In a game machine that is configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on the set values, there is a risk that interest in the game may rather be reduced. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a game machine of means 1 of the fifth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
Setting means that can be set to one of the setting values of multiple stages based on the setting operation (for example, the setting value "1" to the setting value "3") (for example, the step in the game control microcomputer 100 012IWS042) and
Game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, a portion that executes steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100),
Information output means (for example, step 012IWS047, S178 in game control microcomputer 100) that can output setting value information (for example, setting value command) that can specify which setting value is set and ,
Based on the set value information output from the information output means, a suggestive effect execution means (for example, a second effect) capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, a suggestive effect before a game, a suggestive effect during a game, a suggestive effect during a big hit) a portion for executing steps 012IWS509 to S515, S704 to S709, and S901 to S906 in the control CPU 012IW120b;
The suggestive effect executing means limits execution of the suggestive effect when the set value information output from the information output means is not normal (for example, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b determines N, When N in S708 and N in S905, pre-game suggestive effect, during-game suggestive effect, and during big hit suggestive effect are not executed)
According to this feature, in a gaming machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set value, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game. be able to.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the fifth invention,
The information output means can output the set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 012IWS047 and S178 to transmit the set value command when the power is turned on and when the variation starts. do)
According to such a configuration, even if the setting value information cannot be input normally at a certain timing, the setting value information can be input normally at the next timing. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the fifth invention,
The suggestive effect execution means performs, as the suggestive effect, a first suggestive effect with a high degree of specificity of the set value (for example, a pre-game suggestive effect and a suggestive effect during the game according to the third effect mode, and a jackpot during the fourth effect mode). Suggestion performance) and a second suggestion performance with a low degree of specificity of the set value (for example, a pre-game suggestion performance by the first performance mode, a game suggestion performance, and a big hit suggestion performance) can be executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the fifth invention,
The suggestive effect execution means performs a suggestive effect (for example, pre-game suggestive effect or According to this configuration, the state of the gaming machine before the start of the game is made interesting, and the game can be played from an early time zone. It is possible to give a motivation to play and increase the amusement of the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 5 of the fifth invention,
The suggestive effect execution means is set at least during the game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (from setting change to execution of variable display 30 times)) elapses after the setting value is changed. Suggestive effects can be executed at different ratios according to the set values (for example, see FIGS. 8-9 (A), (B), FIGS. 8-29 (A), (B))
According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player with a motivation to play a game for a predetermined period of time, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 6 of the fifth invention,
The suggestive effect execution means can execute the suggestive effect at different ratios according to the set value (for example, see FIGS. 8-29 (A), (B), etc.),
It is described that an informing means (for example, a part in which the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b executes step S012IWS516) capable of informing information about the executed suggestive effect may be further provided, and such a configuration is described. According to this, it is possible to confirm the suggestive effect executed in the past, and to increase the interest in the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 7 of the fifth invention,
The suggestive effect execution means can execute the suggestive effect at different ratios according to the set value (for example, see FIGS. 8-31 (A), (B), etc.),
Predetermined effects in which the suggestive effect is difficult to recognize when executed in parallel with the suggestive effect (for example, character effects in which the big win suggestive effect is difficult to recognize when executed in parallel with the big win suggestive effect) a predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a light guide plate effect, an error display, etc.;
Limiting means for limiting the execution of the predetermined effect when the suggestive effect is executed (for example, when the suggestive effect during the jackpot is executed, the execution of the character product effect is limited. See FIG. 8-31 (D)) According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 8 of the fifth invention,
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at a different rate according to the set value (for example, see FIGS. 8-31 (A), (B), etc.),
Predetermined notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification in a manner in which the setting suggestion is difficult to recognize when executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, when executed in parallel with the big win suggestion performance, the big win suggestion performance is recognized. It is also described that additional effects such as character effects, light guide plate effects, error displays, etc., that make the game difficult to play may be provided.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 9 of the fifth invention,
A predetermined control period in an advantageous state (for example, a fanfare period, an interval period, an ending period, etc. during a jackpot game) differs depending on the set value (for example, see FIG. 8-8).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 10 of the fifth invention,
A predetermined control period (for example, variable time) for variable display differs depending on the set value (for example, see FIGS. 8-10)
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 11 of the fifth invention,
Equipped with an opening/closing body that can be opened and closed, and a regulation member (for example, security cover 012IW500A/security cover 012IW500B/security cover 012IW500C) capable of regulating the operation of the operation unit,
When the opening/closing body is closed, the regulating member maintains the regulated state in which the operation of the operating portion is regulated, and when the opening/closing body is opened, the regulated state can be released (for example, when the game machine frame 012IW003 is closed). In the state where the security cover 012IW500A is closed, the security cover 012IW500A maintains a restricted state in which operations on the operation unit including the setting key 012IW051 are restricted. is released, and the operation of the setting key 012IW051 is permitted (Figs. 8-5, 8-6, 8-49 to 8-52).
It is described that such a configuration may be used, and according to such a configuration, security is improved.

In addition, the characteristic portion 099IW also includes a sixth invention described below. In other words, conventionally, a pachinko machine configured to be able to set one of a plurality of set values based on a setting operation, and to be able to control an advantageous state based on the set set value. As a game machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902. In JP-A-2010-200902, a change stop command (set value designation command) corresponding to the setting value before and after the change is sent from the main control board to the production control board, and the setting before and after the change obtained by the change stop command It is described that, based on the values, three types of presentation patterns corresponding to three types of characters, giraffe, elephant, and lion, are displayed. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a possibility that an erroneous suggestion effect may be executed when the setting value information (setting value specifying command) is not normal. In a game machine that is configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on the set values, there is a risk that interest in the game may rather be reduced. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a game machine of means 1 of the sixth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
Setting means that can be set to one of the setting values of multiple stages based on the setting operation (for example, the setting value "1" to the setting value "3") (for example, the step in the game control microcomputer 100 012IWS042) and
Game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, a portion that executes steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100),
Information output means (for example, step 012IWS047, S178 in game control microcomputer 100) that can output setting value information (for example, setting value command) that can specify which setting value is set and ,
Based on the set value information output from the information output means, a suggestive effect execution means (for example, a second effect) capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, a suggestive effect before a game, a suggestive effect during a game, a suggestive effect during a big hit) a portion for executing steps 012IWS509 to S515, S704 to S709, and S901 to S906 in the control CPU 012IW120b;
The suggestion effect execution means is
As the suggestive effect, a first suggestive effect (for example, a pre-game suggestive effect and a suggestive effect during the game according to the third effect mode, a suggestive effect during the jackpot according to the fourth effect mode) and a second suggestive effect (for example, a game according to the first effect mode) It is possible to execute a previous suggesting effect, a suggesting effect during the game, a suggesting effect during the jackpot),
When the set value information output from the information output means is not normal, the second suggestive effect can be executed as the suggestive effect without executing the first suggestive effect as the suggestive effect (for example, The second effect control CPU 012IW120b does not execute the pre-game suggesting effect, the in-game suggesting effect by the third effect mode, and the jackpot middle suggesting effect by the fourth effect mode by executing steps 012IWS514, S709, and S906.)
According to this feature, in a gaming machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set value, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game. be able to.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the sixth invention,
The information output means can output the set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 012IWS047 and S178 to transmit the set value command when the power is turned on and when the variation starts. do)
According to such a configuration, even if the setting value information cannot be input normally at a certain timing, the setting value information can be input normally at the next timing. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the sixth invention,
The suggestive effect execution means performs, as the suggestive effect, a first suggestive effect with a high degree of specificity of the set value (for example, a pre-game suggestive effect and a suggestive effect during the game according to the third effect mode, and a jackpot during the fourth effect mode). Suggestion performance) and a second suggestion performance with a low degree of specificity of the set value (for example, a pre-game suggestion performance by the first performance mode, a game suggestion performance, and a big hit suggestion performance) can be executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the sixth invention,
Using a plurality of types of determination data (for example, a pre-game suggestive effect determination table, a during-game suggestive effect determination table, a jackpot during a suggestive effect determination table) for determining the suggestive effect execution mode, the suggestive effect execution mode is determined. Suggestion effect determination means to be determined (for example, a part that executes steps 012IWS510, S512, S514, S705, S707, S709, S902, S904, and S906 in the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b),
The suggestive effect determining means includes:
Using the decision data according to the setting value that is set among the plurality of types of decision data, determine the execution mode of the suggestion effect Step 012 IWS510, S705 and S902 are executed based on the stored set values),
When the set value information is not input normally, using dedicated determination data (for example, a pre-game suggestive effect determination table for effect mode C, a game suggestive effect determination table, a jackpot mid-suggestive effect determination table), Determines the execution mode of the suggestive effect (for example, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b uses a pre-game suggestive effect determination table for effect mode C, a suggestive effect determination table during the game, and a suggestive effect determination table during the big hit, Step 012 Execute IWS514, S709, S906)
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 5 of the sixth invention,
The suggestive effect executing means performs a suggestive effect (for example, a pre-game suggestive effect or According to such a configuration, it is possible to make players interested in the state of the gaming machine before the start of the game, and to start the game from an early time zone. It is possible to give a motivation to play and increase the amusement of the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 6 of the sixth invention,
The suggestive effect execution means is set at least during the game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (from setting change to execution of variable display 30 times)) elapses after the setting value is changed. Suggestive effects can be executed at different ratios according to the set values (for example, see FIGS. 8-9 (A), (B), FIGS. 8-29 (A), (B))
According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player with a motivation to play a game for a predetermined period of time, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 7 of the sixth invention,
The suggestive effect execution means can execute the suggestive effect at different ratios according to the set value (for example, see FIGS. 8-29 (A), (B), etc.),
It is described that an informing means (for example, a part in which the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b executes step S012IWS516) capable of informing information about the executed suggestive effect may be further provided, and such a configuration is described. According to this, it is possible to confirm the suggestive effect executed in the past, and to increase the interest in the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 8 of the sixth invention,
The suggestive effect execution means can execute the suggestive effect at different ratios according to the set value (for example, see FIGS. 8-31 (A), (B), etc.),
Predetermined effects in which the suggestive effect is difficult to recognize when executed in parallel with the suggestive effect (for example, character effects in which the big win suggestive effect is difficult to recognize when executed in parallel with the big win suggestive effect) a predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a light guide plate effect, an error display, etc.;
Limiting means for limiting the execution of the predetermined effect when the suggestive effect is executed (for example, when the suggestive effect during the jackpot is executed, the execution of the character product effect is limited. See FIG. 8-31 (D)) According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 9 of the sixth invention,
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at a different rate according to the set value (for example, see FIGS. 8-31 (A), (B), etc.),
Predetermined notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification in a manner in which the setting suggestion is difficult to recognize when executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, when executed in parallel with the big win suggestion performance, the big win suggestion performance is recognized. It is also described that additional effects such as character effects, light guide plate effects, error displays, etc., that make the game difficult to play may be provided.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 10 of the sixth invention,
A predetermined control period in an advantageous state (for example, a fanfare period, an interval period, an ending period, etc. during a jackpot game) differs depending on the set value (for example, see FIG. 8-8).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 11 of the sixth invention,
A predetermined control period (for example, variable time) for variable display differs depending on the set value (for example, see FIGS. 8-10)
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 12 of the sixth invention,
Equipped with an opening/closing body that can be opened and closed, and a regulation member (for example, security cover 012IW500A/security cover 012IW500B/security cover 012IW500C) capable of regulating the operation of the operation unit,
When the opening/closing body is closed, the regulating member maintains the regulated state in which the operation of the operating portion is regulated, and when the opening/closing body is opened, the regulated state can be released (for example, when the game machine frame 012IW003 is closed). In the state where the security cover 012IW500A is closed, the security cover 012IW500A maintains a restricted state in which operations on the operation unit including the setting key 012IW051 are restricted. is released, and the operation of the setting key 012IW051 is permitted (Figs. 8-5, 8-6, 8-49 to 8-52).
It is described that such a configuration may be used, and according to such a configuration, security is improved.

It should be noted that this feature part 099IW is configured so that it can be changed to three types of production modes A to C. Assuming that a predetermined set value that is low in the advantage for the player is set, the suggestive effect can be executed (structure of the above-described fourth invention), and when the effect mode B is controlled, the set value is set. When the information is not input normally, the execution of the suggestive effect is restricted (configuration of the above fifth invention), and when the effect mode C is controlled, the set value information is input normally. If not, the first suggestive effect is not executed as the suggestive effect, and the second suggestive effect is configured to be executable as the suggestive effect (configuration of the above-described sixth invention). I can't limit it. For example, according to the game state, it is possible to switch which of the control methods of the fourth invention to the sixth invention is used to execute the suggestive effect. In this case, for example, if the game state is a normal state, if the set value information is not input normally, it is possible to execute the suggestive effect assuming that the set value is set to a predetermined set value with a low degree of advantage for the player. Configuration (configuration of the above-mentioned fourth invention), and if the game state is a time-saving state, if the set value information is not input normally, it is configured to limit the execution of the suggestive effect (above-mentioned fifth invention) configuration), and if the game state is a probability variable state, when the set value information is not input normally, the first suggestion performance is not executed as the suggestion performance, and the second suggestion performance is executed as the suggestion performance ( The configuration of the sixth invention described above) may be used.

In addition, it is not necessary to be configured to be able to execute suggestive effects by all the control methods of the fourth invention to the sixth invention shown above, and it is possible to execute suggestive effects by using only one of the control methods. good too.

In addition, in this characteristic part 099IW, when the setting value command itself cannot be received due to reasons such as missing data or garbled data, the execution of the suggestion effect is controlled by the control methods of the above-described fourth to sixth inventions (suggestion Although the case of restricting production has been shown, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, a setting value command is received, but if the received setting value command is inconsistent, the suggestive effect may be restricted. In this case, for example, each time a set value command is received, the set value indicated by the set value command received by the effect control means is stored. If the set value indicated by the set value command received in the previous step does not match the previously stored set value, it is determined that an inconsistency has occurred, and the suggestive effect is executed by the control methods of the above-described fourth to sixth inventions. You may make it control (limit suggestion production).

Also, the way in which the game is differentiated for each set value "1" to "3" is not limited to that shown in this example. For example, in the case of odd-numbered setting values such as setting values "1" and "3", when renso (the occurrence of a succession of jackpots during a variable probability state) is likely to occur, and renso occurs. In the case of even-numbered set values such as set value "2", the set value is configured to be relatively constant and does not change. A suggestive effect suggesting an odd number may be configured to be executable. In this case, if the set value command cannot be received normally, the control method of the fourth to sixth inventions is used to control the execution of the suggesting effect suggesting that the set value is an odd number. It may be configured to (limit the suggestive effect).

In addition, the characteristic portion 099IW also includes a seventh invention shown below. That is, conventionally, there is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, disclosed in JP-A-2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, setting values are suggested only during variable display, and there is a problem that the interest cannot be enhanced sufficiently. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a game machine of means 1 of the seventh invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display and is controllable to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state, etc.) that is advantageous to a player,
a setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) that can be set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3);
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5) that can execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set;
a suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, setting suggestive effect) suggesting the set value,
The suggestive effect execution means provides a suggestive effect (e.g., a pre-game suggestive effect) at a different rate according to the set value at least during a period from when the set value is changed until the first variable display is executed. ), which is characterized by the fact that it is possible to execute the state of the game machine before the start of the game, and the game can be played from an early time zone. It is possible to give a motivation to play and increase the amusement of the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the seventh invention,
A gaming machine capable of executing variable display of performance identification information (for example, decoration pattern),
The suggestive effect execution means provides a suggestive effect (for example, It is described that the display of the initial odd numbers) may be made executable, and according to such a configuration, the interest in the game can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the seventh invention,
The suggestive effect executing means can execute the suggestive effect according to the set value when the power supply to the game machine is restored after the power supply to the game machine is stopped (for example, FIG. 8 -26 As shown in (A) and (B), a pre-game suggestion effect determination table with different determination values is used)
According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the seventh invention,
The suggestive effect executing means can execute a specific suggestive effect suggesting the set value after the variable display is started (for example, a suggestive effect during a game, a suggestive effect during a big win, etc.),
It is described that the specific suggestive effect may have a higher degree of reliability for the set value suggested than the suggestive effect, and according to such a configuration, the amusement of the game can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 5 of the seventh invention,
A game machine capable of playing games using game media (for example, game balls),
Based on the entry of the game medium into a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712) a game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12);
an information display means (for example, a display monitor 012IW029) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving means;
The information display means is capable of displaying set values (for example, a portion of the display monitor 012IW029 that can display the continuous ratio, the role ratio, and the base).
According to this configuration, it is possible to suppress an increase in manufacturing costs.

In addition, the characteristic portion 099IW also includes an eighth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, there is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, disclosed in JP-A-2010-200902. However, the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 has a problem that it cannot effectively motivate the player to play the game, and the interest cannot be enhanced sufficiently. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a game machine of means 1 of the eighth invention for solving the problem,
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
a setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) that can be set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3);
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5) that can execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set;
a suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, setting suggestive effect) suggesting the set value,
The suggestive effect executing means performs the setting during the game until at least a predetermined period (for example, a special period (after the setting is changed until the variable display is executed 30 times)) elapses after the setting value is changed. Suggestive effects can be executed at different ratios according to the set values (for example, see FIGS. 8-9 (A) and (B), FIGS. 8-29 (A) and (B)).
According to this feature, it is possible to give the player a motivation to play a game for a predetermined period of time, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the eighth invention,
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
variable display pattern determination means for determining a variable display pattern;
variable display execution means for executing variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means;
The variable display pattern determination means determines one of a plurality of variable display patterns at different ratios depending on whether the set value is changed or not (for example, FIG. 8-9 (A), ( B) see),
It is described that the variable display execution means may execute variable display using a common background image when the setting value is changed and when the setting value is not changed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the interest in the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the eighth invention,
variable display pattern determination means for determining a variable display pattern;
variable display execution means for executing variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means;
The variable display pattern determination means determines one of the plurality of variable display patterns at different ratios when the set value is set to the first set value and when the set value is set to the second set value by the setting means. (See, for example, FIGS. 8-9 (A), (B), etc.),
The variable display executing means can execute variable display using a common background image when the set value is set to the first set value and when the set value is set to the second set value by the setting means. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the game interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the eighth invention,
The suggestive effect execution means determines that a predetermined condition has been established within a predetermined period (for example, a big hit in a specific period, the number of times the ready-to-win effect or pseudo-continuous effect has been executed reaches a predetermined number, or a specific super ready-to-win effect or that the advance notice effect has been executed, etc.), the suggestive effect can be executed (for example, if a big hit occurs within a specific period, the suggestive effect can be executed during the big hit. Fig. 8-31 ( A), (B) reference)
According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 5 of the eighth invention,
A game machine capable of playing games using game media (for example, game balls),
Based on the entry of the game medium into a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712) a game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12);
an information display means (for example, a display monitor 012IW029) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving means;
The information display means is capable of displaying set values (for example, a portion of the display monitor 012IW029 that can display the continuous ratio, the role ratio, and the base).
According to this configuration, it is possible to suppress an increase in manufacturing costs.

In addition, the characteristic portion 099IW also includes a ninth invention described below. That is, conventionally, there is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, disclosed in JP-A-2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that it is not possible to confirm the suggestive effect executed in the past, and thus the interest cannot be enhanced sufficiently. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a game machine of means 1 of the ninth invention for solving the problem,
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
a setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) that can be set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3);
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5, etc.) that can execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set;
a suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, setting suggestive effect) suggesting the set value,
The suggestive effect execution means can execute the suggestive effect at different ratios according to the set value (for example, see FIGS. 8-29 (A), (B), etc.),
A game machine characterized by further comprising notifying means (for example, a portion in which the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b executes step S 012IWS 516) capable of notifying information about the executed suggestive effect is described. According to this, it is possible to confirm the suggestive effect executed in the past, and to increase the interest in the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the ninth invention,
The reporting means can report the number of times the suggestive effect is executed (for example, the part where the second effect control CPU012IW120b executes step S012IWS516).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the ninth invention,
The notification means can notify the contents of the executed suggestion effect (for example, the part where the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b executes step S012IWS516).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the ninth invention,
The notifying means can notify the information about the suggested effect that has been executed while the variable display is not being executed (for example, the part where the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b executes step S012IWS516).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 5 of the ninth invention,
information generating means for generating information (for example, execution history information) about the executed suggestive effect;
image generation means for generating a specific image (for example, a two-dimensional code including execution history information) from which the information can be read by an imaging device;
It is described that a display means (for example, an image display device 5) for displaying the specific image in a manner that can be captured by the imaging device may be provided. can increase

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 6 of the ninth invention,
A game machine capable of playing games using game media (for example, game balls),
Based on the entry of the game medium into a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712) a game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12);
an information display means (for example, a display monitor 012IW029) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving means;
The information display means is capable of displaying set values (for example, a portion of the display monitor 012IW029 that can display the continuous ratio, the role ratio, and the base).
According to this configuration, it is possible to suppress an increase in manufacturing costs.

In addition, the present characteristic portion 099IW also includes a tenth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, there is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, disclosed in JP-A-2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that if the setting suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize due to other effects, interest may be lost. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a game machine of means 1 of the tenth invention for solving the problem,
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
a setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) that can be set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3);
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5) that can execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set;
a suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, setting suggestive effect) suggesting the set value,
The suggestive effect executing means can execute the suggestive effect at different ratios according to the set value (for example, see FIGS. 8-31 (A), (B), etc.),
Predetermined effects in which the suggestive effect is difficult to recognize when executed in parallel with the suggestive effect (for example, character effects in which the big win suggestive effect is difficult to recognize when executed in parallel with the big win suggestive effect) a predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a light guide plate effect, an error display, etc.;
Limiting means for limiting the execution of the predetermined performance when the suggestive performance is executed (for example, when the suggestive performance during the big hit is executed, the execution of the character performance is restricted. See (D))
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the tenth invention,
The restricting means changes the execution timing of at least one of the suggestive effect and the predetermined effect when the execution timings of the suggested effect and the predetermined effect overlap (for example, one of them is executed during the fanfare period and the other is performed during the ending period). change it to run during the period)
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the tenth invention,
The limiting means prohibits the execution of the predetermined effect when the suggestive effect is executed (for example, when the suggestive effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the character product effect is prohibited. See FIG. 8-31 (D). )
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the tenth invention,
When the suggestive effect is executed, the limiting means executes the predetermined effect in a performance mode in which the suggestive effect is not difficult to recognize (for example, the movable member 012IW101 is operated in an operation mode different from the normal one (for example, during the big hit). Control so that it does not stop at the position overlapping with the dialogue image by production))
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 5 of the tenth invention,
Both the suggestive effect and the predetermined effect (for example, a fanfare effect in which a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5) include display on one display means (for example, the image display device 5),
It is described that the first display means may display a display related to the suggestive effect with priority over a display related to the predetermined effect. can be done.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 6 of the tenth invention,
A game machine capable of playing games using game media (for example, game balls),
Based on the entry of the game medium into a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712) a game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12);
an information display means (for example, a display monitor 012IW029) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving means;
The information display means is capable of displaying set values (for example, a portion of the display monitor 012IW029 that can display the continuous ratio, the role ratio, and the base).
According to this configuration, it is possible to suppress an increase in manufacturing costs.

In addition, the present characteristic portion 099IW also includes an eleventh invention shown below. That is, conventionally, there is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, disclosed in JP-A-2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that the player may lose interest in the game due to execution of setting suggestion effects that are not preferable to the player. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a game machine of means 1 of the eleventh invention for solving the problem,
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
a setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) that can be set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3);
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5) that can execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set;
a setting suggestion executing means capable of executing a setting suggestion (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests the set value,
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at different ratios according to the set value (for example, see FIGS. 8-31 (A), (B), etc.),
Predetermined notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification in a manner in which the setting suggestion is difficult to recognize when executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, when executed in parallel with the big win suggestion performance, the big win suggestion performance is recognized. The game machine is further equipped with a hard-to-play character effect, a light guide plate effect, an error display, etc.), and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the loss of interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the eleventh invention,
It is described that the predetermined notification means may be capable of executing a predetermined notification (for example, performance of a character) to operate the movable member (for example, the movable member 012IW101). , can enhance the performance effect.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the eleventh invention,
a light-transmitting light guide plate (for example, a light guide plate 012IW103);
and a light emitter provided so that light can enter from the end surface of the light guide plate,
The light guide plate is provided with a reflection part for reflecting light incident on the inside of the light guide plate from the end surface of the light guide plate by the light emitter and emitting the light to the front surface of the game machine,
The predetermined notification means can execute a predetermined notification (e.g., light guide plate presentation) for emitting light from the reflecting portion provided on the light guide plate to the front surface of the game machine by causing the light emitter to emit light. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the eleventh invention,
It is described that the predetermined notification means may be capable of executing a predetermined notification that displays an error. With such a configuration, an error can be appropriately notified.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 5 of the eleventh invention,
The setting suggestion executing means includes a first setting suggestion that suggests that the first set value is set (for example, a suggestion effect during the jackpot in the first effect mode; see FIGS. 8-31 (A) and (B)), and , a second setting suggestion that suggests that the second set value is set to have a higher advantage for the player than the first set value (for example, a suggestion effect during the jackpot in the third effect mode; FIG. 8-31 ( A), see (B)) and can be executed,
The predetermined notification means can execute the predetermined notification at a higher rate when the first setting suggestion is performed than when the second setting suggestion is performed (see, for example, FIG. 8-31(E)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 6 of the eleventh invention,
A setting suggestion setting means capable of setting an execution ratio of setting suggestions is provided (for example, a setting screen is displayed after the power is turned on, an operating means such as a push button 31B, or an operating means such as a switch provided inside the game machine (management can be operated only by the user), so that the settings related to the setting suggestion effect can be changed)
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 7 of the eleventh invention,
A gaming machine that performs variable display of identification information,
A variable display device that can variably display identification information by rotating a variable display member (for example, a drum-shaped or belt-shaped movable body) on which identification information is arranged,
The variable display device performs a specific operation in the first variable display of the identification information after the setting value is changed,
It is described that the predetermined notification means may execute the predetermined notification at a high rate in the first variable display of the identification information after the setting value is changed. A decline in interest can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 8 of the eleventh invention,
A game machine capable of playing games using game media (for example, game balls),
Based on the entry of the game medium into a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712) a game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12);
an information display means (for example, a display monitor 012IW029) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving means;
The information display means is capable of displaying set values (for example, a portion of the display monitor 012IW029 that can display the continuous ratio, the role ratio, and the base).
According to this configuration, it is possible to suppress an increase in manufacturing costs.

In addition, the characteristic portion 099IW also includes a twelfth invention described below. That is, conventionally, there is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, disclosed in JP-A-2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that gambling properties may become too high when the advantage is set to be high. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a game machine of means 1 of the twelfth invention for solving the problem,
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
a setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) that can be set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3);
A game control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5, etc.) that can execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set.
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, the fanfare period, the interval period, the ending period, etc. during the jackpot game) differs depending on the set value (for example, see FIG. 8-8).
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the twelfth invention,
The fanfare control period in the advantageous state differs depending on the set value (for example, see FIG. 8-8 (B))
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the twelfth invention,
The interval control period in the advantageous state differs depending on the set value (for example, see FIG. 8-8 (B))
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the twelfth invention,
The ending control period in the advantageous state differs depending on the set value (for example, see FIG. 8-8 (B))
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 5 of the twelfth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing games using gaming values,
a game value imparting means for imparting a game value based on the establishment of a specific condition;
The setting means has a first set value (for example, a set value of 3), and the game value imparted by the game value imparting means is larger than the first set value so as to match the game value used in the game. It can be set to a second setting value (for example, setting value 1) that occupies a higher proportion,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state is longer when set to the second set value than when set to the first set value (for example, FIGS. 8-8 (A) and (B) reference)
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 6 of the twelfth invention,
It is described that a suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a suggestive effect suggesting a set value (for example, a suggestive effect during a big hit) may be provided in a predetermined control period in an advantageous state. According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase interest in the predetermined control period in an advantageous state.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 7 of the twelfth invention,
Equipped with production execution means capable of executing production,
The effect executing means can execute a common effect (for example, a common fanfare effect, an interval effect, an ending effect, etc.) during a predetermined control period in an advantageous state, regardless of a set value. It is described that such a configuration may enhance the interest of the predetermined control period in advantageous conditions.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 8 of the twelfth invention,
It is described that the predetermined control period in the advantageous state may be determined in advance according to the set value. You can prevent it from slipping.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 9 of the twelfth invention,
A gaming machine that can be controlled in a plurality of types of advantageous states,
The game control means can be controlled to any one of the plurality of types of advantageous states (for example, jackpot types A to C) by different ratios based on the set value,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state differs depending on the type of the advantageous state (see, for example, FIG. 8-8(B))
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 10 of the twelfth invention,
A game machine capable of playing games using game media (for example, game balls),
Based on the entry of the game medium into a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712) a game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12);
an information display means (for example, a display monitor 012IW029) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving means;
The information display means is capable of displaying set values (for example, a portion of the display monitor 012IW029 that can display the continuous ratio, the role ratio, and the base).
According to this configuration, it is possible to suppress an increase in manufacturing costs.

In addition, the present characteristic portion 099IW also includes a thirteenth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, there is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, disclosed in JP-A-2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that gambling properties may become too high when the advantage is set to be high. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a game machine of means 1 of the thirteenth invention for solving the problem,
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
a setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) that can be set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3);
A game control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5, etc.) that can execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set.
A predetermined control period (for example, variable time) for variable display differs depending on the set value (for example, see FIGS. 8-10)
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the thirteenth invention,
The variable display period varies depending on the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 8-10)
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the thirteenth invention,
It is stated that the period during which the display result of the variable display is displayed may be changed according to the set value. can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the thirteenth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing games using gaming values,
a game value imparting means for imparting a game value based on the establishment of a specific condition;
The setting means has a first set value (for example, a set value of 3), and the game value imparted by the game value imparting means is larger than the first set value so as to match the game value used in the game. It can be set to a second setting value (for example, setting value 1) that occupies a higher proportion,
The predetermined control period for variable display is longer when set to the second set value than when set to the first set value (see, for example, FIG. 8-10).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 5 of the thirteenth invention,
It is described that the predetermined control period regarding the variable display may be determined in advance according to the set value. You can prevent it from slipping.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 6 of the thirteenth invention,
variable display pattern determination means for determining a variable display pattern;
variable display execution means for executing variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means;
The variable display pattern determining means determines one of a plurality of variable display patterns having different variable display periods at different ratios according to the set value (see FIGS. 8-10, for example).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 7 of the thirteenth invention,
A game machine capable of playing games using game media (for example, game balls),
Based on the entry of the game medium into a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712) a game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12);
an information display means (for example, a display monitor 012IW029) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving means;
The information display means is capable of displaying set values (for example, a portion of the display monitor 012IW029 that can display the continuous ratio, the role ratio, and the base).
According to this configuration, it is possible to suppress an increase in manufacturing costs.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 099IW, a case has been shown in which the setting value can be set in three stages from "1" to "3". It may be configured so that it can be set to a value, or configured so that it can be set to two levels of set values. In this case, for example, it is configured to be able to set to 6 levels of set values, the expectation (reliability) for the big hit is the lowest when the set value is "1", and the expectation for the big hit (reliability) is the lowest when the set value is "6". reliability) may be configured to be the highest.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1... Pachinko machine 2... Game board 3... Frame for game machine 4A, 4B... Special symbol display device 5... Image display device 6A... Winning ball device 6B... Variable winning ball device 7... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R... Speaker 9... Game effect lamp 10... General prize winning port 11... Main board 12... Effect control board 13... Sound control board 14... Lamp control board 15... Relay board 20... Normal symbol display 21... Gate switch 22A, 22B... Starting port Switch 23...Count switch 30...Battering operation handle 31A...Stick controller 31B...Push button 32...Movable body 100...Game control microcomputer 101, 121...ROM
102, 122... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124... random number circuit 105, 125... I/O
120 ... CPU for production control
123: display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of playing games,
power means;
a first control means for performing control by receiving power supply from the power supply means;
a second control means for receiving power supply from the power supply means and storing predetermined information regarding activation based on the instruction information from the first control means;
monitoring means for monitoring the power supplied to the second control means and outputting a predetermined signal to the second control means when the power supply voltage of the power supply is less than a predetermined value ;
The second control means is capable of executing a first backup process of storing control-related information in the first storage means and a second backup process of storing control-related information in the second storage means,
The first backup process is a process of storing one piece of information in one storage area,
The second backup process is a process of storing one piece of information in a plurality of storage areas,
The second control means is
executing different start-up processing depending on whether or not the predetermined signal is output from the monitoring means at start-up;
Initialization control is not started when the predetermined signal is output from the monitoring means at startup, initialization control is started after output of the predetermined signal is stopped, and instruction information from the first control means is started. storing the predetermined information in the first storage means based on
Specific information that can specify that only the second control means of the first control means and the second control means has restarted when the predetermined signal is not output from the monitoring means at the time of startup. stored in the second storage means
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images